Home

Ford 2007 Focus Automobile User Manual

1. top side and bottom front of the oe headlamp assembly ZS F 3 Pull the assembly straight out H 7 i re 4 TH 1 L JE o4 4 Remove the bulb assembly 1 sidemarker or 2 park turn by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out 5 Pull the old bulb out from the socket Q o wN 2 Ol Install the new bulb s in reverse order 88 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing headlamp bulbs sealed beam 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood 2 Remove the three screws and one bolt from the top and bottom of the park lamp bezel assembly 3 Remove the four screws and the headlamp retaining ring from headlamp o 4 Disconnect the electrical J connector from the headlamp Po Install the new bulb s in reverse order 89 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing park turn sidemarker bulbs sealed beam 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood 2 Remove the four bolts from the top side and bottom of the park lamp bezel assembly 3 Pull the assembly straight out disengaging snap clip 4 Remove the bulb assembly sidemark
2. The AM FM stereo system does not contain rear speakers only front driver side and passenger side speakers Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches and radio may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 1 V Tuner Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings 2 AUDIO Press AUDIO repeatedly to gain access to the following settings TREB Treble Press AUDIO to reach the treble setting Use A V lt SEEK 22 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems BASS Bass Press AUDIO to reach the bass setting Use amp IV lt q SEEKP BAL Balance Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting Use A IV q SEEK pP to adjust between the left and right speakers Setting the clock Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash then use A IV 4 SEEK P to adjust To adjust minutes press CLK again to make the minutes start to flash and use A IV 4 SEEK P to adjust Press CLK again to exit the clock setting mode 3 SEEK Press lt SEEK gt to access the previous next strong station 4 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset button until
3. Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on The foglamp indicator light will illuminate 80 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output To activate e the ignition must be in the ON position e the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp position and e the parking brake must be disengaged Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever towards you to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate 81 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable illuminated switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation Move the control to the full upright position past detent to turn on the interior lamps AIMING THE HEADLAMPS Your vehicle may be equipped with a sealed beam or aerodynamic headlamp system Sealed beam headla
4. e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Enables calibrated gauges to work properly 324 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir e The engine coolant should be at the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Do no
5. Move the transfer case lever to 2H 2WD at a stop or a vehicle speed H A below 5 mph 8 km h 4H With the vehicle at complete stop N disengage the locking hubs optional by rotating the hub lock 4L control from LOCK to FREE e For proper operation make sure that both indicator arrows on the hub are aligned and that both hubs are set to FREE Shifting from 4H 4x4 High to 4L 4x4 Low 1 Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph 8 km h 2 Place the gearshift lever in N Neutral If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission also depress the clutch pedal 3 Move the transfer case shift lever through N Neutral directly to 4L 4x4 Low 4 If the shift lever does not or only partially moves to the 4L 4x4 Low position perform a shift with the transmission in N Neutral or clutch pedal depressed and the vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h This will ensure the transfer case is fully engaged into 4L 4x4 Low Shifting from 4L 4x4 Low to 4H 4x4 High or 2H 2WD 1 Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph 8 km h 2 Place the gearshift lever in N Neutral If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission also depress the clutch pedal 251 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving 3 Move the transfer case shift lever through N Neutral directly to 4H 4x4 High or 2H 2WD 4 If the transfer case w
6. 27 28 29 oo EA E 38 39 39 40 41 42 43 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 e a IE Don The high current fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description e Mania ee Oe l Relay Blower motor Variable blower control O BY etttoae Cime Coma o 2 Relay Electronic Shift on the Fly ESOF Lo Hi 3 Relay Heater mirror ooa CU Not used PF 5 30A Trailer Brake Controller TBC 6 A0A ABS module Pump 8 30A Up tter auxiliary switch 2 9 A0A ABS module Coil 12 15A Brake On Off BOO relay feed 5A Brake switch Brake switch relay coil SJB O ee ee E a a P Noted o ae 274 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Relay Fuel Pump Driver Module FPDM Fuel injectors Gasoline engines Diesel Fuel Control Module DFCM Diesel engine 19 Relay Back up lamps Reverse Sensing System OS BMY ens state compartment ise 63 Lamp CHMSL TBC Customer access C aC a P o Notus o 27 50A Glow Plug Control Module GPCM 1 a ae ee ee 36 10A Gasoline engines Powertrain Control Module PCM keep alive power Canister vent Diesel engine Engine Control Module ECM keep alive power 10A Transmission Control Module TCM Diesel engine only peor Sd 275 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Own
7. Belt Minder ccccccceeeeee 167 extension assembly 170 for adults 2 160 162 164 for children 00 180 181 lap Delt wo ee ceeseeeeseeeeeenes 166 safety belt maintenance 170 warning light and Chime corela 166 167 Safety seats for children 184 Safety Compliance Certification Label 0 357 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index Satellite Radio Information 40 Seat belts see Safety restraints 158 DEALS seroren reaL AEE EENE cess 151 child safety seats 00000000 184 Cleaning a orree Ee ne ENS 311 heated isiende 75 memory Seat oo 142 156 SecuriLock passive anti theft SYSUCIN csscevascrsncssseavagevesastass 148 149 Servicing your vehicle 314 Setting the clock AMEM CD rerin 25 AM FM In dash 6 CD 004 31 Snowplowing 0 8 262 264 Spark plugs specifications s 350 356 Special Notice ccceesceeeeeeees 9 ambulance conversions 8 diesel powered vehicles 8 utility type vehicles 00 0 8 Speed Control ceeceeeeeeeeees 104 Starting your vehicle 231 233 jump Starting 0 eee 290 Steering wheel CONUTOIS lt sasccnsessnencierenedetenddneesane 107 E sos 3 a A 95 T MAUS AGE a er 131 Tilt steering wheel 0 95 TITOS ieseni 194 195 ALGNMENE ccseessecrecuerscctvecsc
8. Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park automatic transmission or 1 First manual transmission 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator dipstick 319 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e 5 4L 6 8L engine T RRRS 6 Wipe the indicator clean Insert the indicator fully then remove it again e If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL If the oil level is below the MIN mark add enough oil to raise the level within the MIN MAX range Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage Some oil must be removed from the engine by a service technician 7 Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated 320 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine
9. If you get a flat tire while driving e do not brake heavily e gradually decrease the vehicle s speed e hold the steering wheel firmly e slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that is different in one or more of the following type brand size speed rating and tread design If this is the case this dissimilar spare tire is still rated for your vehicle loads GAWR and GVWR 277 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies A The use of tire sealants may damage your tires Dissimilar spare tire wheel information Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only mol
10. In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this owner guide 218 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING Note The trailer towing charts in this section apply to vehicles equipped with gasoline engines for vehicles equipped with diesel engines refer to your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Your vehicle may tow a Conventional Class IV trailer or
11. Note View shown from the rear of the vehicle to clearly identify the A a jack point Note Place the jack directly under axle and inboard of the radius arm so that the jack clears the radius arm e Front F 450 F 550 CL ZA a 286 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Rear F 38350 DRW e Rear F 450 F 550 13 Insert the jack handle into the pump linkage 14 Use an up and down motion with the jack handle to raise the wheel completely off the ground Hydraulic jacks are equipped with a pressure release valve that prevents lifting loads which exceed the jack s rated capacity 15 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 16 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels If replacing the outboard wheel the valve stem must be facing inward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 17 Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve counterclockwise Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more controlled rate of descent 287 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies The following steps apply to all vehicles 18 Remove the jack and fully 1 tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer
12. USA fus Entertainment Systems FULL enabled The FES has control over the primary speaker and secondary headphone audio sources LOCAL The FES has control over the secondary source headphones only The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary speaker audio source LOCKED disabled The FES buttons are locked and all FES button presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject When the DVD system is ON you can then press the memory preset CJ ce ED C CJ CC controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play and Dual Play In Single Play mode all speakers listen to the same media In Dual Play mode rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless or wired not included headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers General information Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license no
13. USA fus Entertainment Systems Frame by frame 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 2 Press the right cursor button The DVD will advance one frame Each K g press of the right cursor button will advance the DVD video by one frame Headphone auxiliary jacks There are wired headphones not included and auxiliary jacks on the left and right side of your DVD system They can be used to plug in wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc On the left side of the system is the Headphone A input jack This 1 2 3 4 headphone will listen to the media selected on the Channel A source When you need to make any adjustments to the media volume Oya etc ensure that the Channel A source is highlighted For more information refer to Headphone adjustments Also located here are the various auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR camcorder video games etc The specific jacks are as follows 1 Yellow video input 2 White left channel audio input 3 Red right channel audio input 4 Black wired headphone jack not included 65 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems The B headphone jack 5 is located on the right side of the DVD system 5 Plug in wired headphones not included here Note The B headphones can only acc
14. Yellow 1 video input White 2 left channel audio OYA input Red 8 right channel audio input 4 Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX 5 Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to DVD AUX If your source is properly plugged in it will appear on the LCD Liquid Crystal Display screen If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source the screen will remain black If the video source is set to DVD AUX the display will automatically turn on if a video signal is detected To listen to audio over the headphones Dual play mode 1 You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless headphones Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and Using wired headphones for further information e Black 4 wired headphone output wired headphones not included 2 Press the headphone speaker button on the DVD player 46 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control Button to indicate which channel is active able to be controlled 3 Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel A or B The audio source will be shown on the display You may change the active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button Note Ch
15. manual transmission To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured 282 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies The following steps apply to F 250 F 350 Single Rear Wheel SRW vehicles only 5 Insert the hooked end of the jack handle into the jack and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle 6 Position the jack according to the following guides e Front 4x2 e Front driver side 4x4 Note Make sure the jack fits onto the flat area on the outboard side of the differential 283 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Front passenger side 4x4 Note View shown from the rear of the vehicle to clearly identify the jack point Place the jack directly under the axle e Rear Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point a 7 Cq Ss Z To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire 7 Turn the jack handle clockwise E until the wheel is completely off the ground and h
16. particularly in off road use As a result of the above dimensional differences SUV s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger Car INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controll
17. t make full throttle starts Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer e To eliminate excessive transmission shifting activate the Tow Haul feature This will also assist in transmission cooling For additional 227 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading information refer to the Understanding the shift positions of the 5 speed automatic transmission section in the Driving chapter e Anticipate stops and brake gradually e Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur e Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare tire If the spare tire is different in size diameter and or width tread type All Season or All Terrain or is from a different manufacturer other than the road tires on your vehicle your spare tire is considered temporary Consult information on the spare Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label for limitations when using Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information Trailer towing safety tips General e Ensure that the trailer safety chains and 7 pin electrical connectors are securely fastened e
18. 167 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day The more we events drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If uncomfortable you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort I was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my _ Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m Set the example teen deaths occur 4 times more with don t wear often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people belts Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see T
19. 180 192 195 196 212 219 223 230 231 231 235 237 240 265 265 267 267 268 277 289 290 296 Table of Contents Customer Assistance 298 Reporting safety defects U S only 304 Reporting safety defects Canada only 305 Cleaning 306 Maintenance and Specifications 314 Hood 315 Engine compartment 316 Engine oil 319 Battery 322 Engine coolant 324 Fuel information 330 Air filter s 349 Part numbers 350 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 352 Accessories 359 Index 361 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2006 Ford Motor Company 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Ce
20. 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 580 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care rll Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out e Wipe discs from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to only play commercially manufactured round 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs Due to technical 38 2008 F 250 350 450 55
21. 3 Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds to set the language choice 4 Press the SETUP control to exit System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4 seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the RESET control and clearing the warning message 128 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories e They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition OFF RUN cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle Warning display Park brake engaged Warning returns after Check brake system n nae es H condilion still exists i Passenger door ajar Rear left door ajar Rear right door ajar Low fuel level Trailer fault if equipped TBC fault if equipped Trailer disconnected if equipped Check air filter Diesel engine only Low brake fluid level Drain water separator Diesel engine only DRIVER DOOR AJAR Di
22. Channel B can listen to either the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs DVD AUX Operation with an aftermarket audio system Headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode 58 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A amp B will be connected to FES DISC Menu mode Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if available Press MENU twice to access the DVD set up menu and the following features 1 ZOOM 2 ANGLE 3 ASPECT RATIO ace 4 LANGUAGE TANGA SUB TITLES 5 SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK Angle mode Select ANGLE to select various angles of view for the DVD L SUB COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK This is disc dependent some DVD discs may have more viewing angles to select from O
23. If equipped with powerfold mirrors you can fold the side mirrors simultaneously using the power mirror switch 1 Rotate the switch to the center neutral position 2 Momentarily pull the switch rearward to auto fold in 3 Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design position Note When powerfolding the mirrors it is normal to hear the sound of the motors Mirror positions from left to right Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 The powerfold mirrors may be folded forward rearward manually to any of the three positions shown and electrically to positions 1 and 2 only If a mirror is folded manually forward to position 3 you must manually fold it back to position 1 or 2 in order for the powerfold function to continue functioning Note Ten or more switch activations within one minute or repeated fold unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during the full travel may cause the system to disable the fold unfold function to protect the motors from overheating Should this occur wait approximately 314 minutes for the system to reset and function to return to normal Note The powerfold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds If you attempt to powerfold 101 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls the mirrors at high speeds they may not fully fold forward rearward slo
24. If the vehicle is equipped with Autolamps this will not affect the procedure While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle Belt Minder activation and deactivation procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the RUN or ON position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately 1 minute 169 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Step 3 must be completed within 60 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 At a moderate speed buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state e After Step 3 is complete the safety belt warning light will be turned on for 3 seconds If Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds at the end of Step 3 Belt Minder will automatically exit programming mode without changing its enable status 4 Within 7 seconds of the light turning on at a moderate speed buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety b
25. Overdrive position and Tow Haul OFF e Shift transfer case to 4x4 LOW when plowing in small areas at speeds below 5 mph 8 km h Shift transfer case to 4x4 HIGH when plowing larger areas or light snow at higher speeds Do not exceed 15 mph 24 km h Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R Reverse until the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped If the vehicle is stuck shift the transmission in a steady motion between forward and reverse gears Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine can overheat Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may overheat Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 55 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander 264 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available 24 hours seven days a week e for the period of five ye
26. SEEK P to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 gt 11 Play Pause This control is operational in CD MP3 Ea mode When a CD MP3 is playing press to pause or play the current CD MP3 The CD MP3 status will display in the radio display If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the DVD supplement for further information 7 SHUFFLE In CD MP3 mode Ea press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In CD MP3 mode press SHUFFLE to play the tracks in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER gt In folder mode press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 27 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press lt q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually r
27. UOTSSTUSULIJ enuen 199 syrenb g g OTOUJUAS MT Ye1O1OJOW pm ase I JSULIL 1Jes1d 10 O ping UOISSTUISUBI enue O0GOGIN SSM WO GIN LX J6 T send 0g pm aseo Ieysuedy ILOAIOSaI UO YYW pue NIW Ueemjoq pmy sulieejs Iamog TA pny d y pinyy UOISSTUISUeAL o NOONAN OND S LX opewomy A NOOYANW p ddmb JD eys epod yom pue yeaq sjoatd pue s geyun ayeiq suppred UOrsstusuely j queoliqn y Joo pue syoel yeas pue SuU q ies ae asvaly sodmqg YMW Joop Jet Teng soyeyd SIX 10 P DX I JMJS soyoyey sosulpy UOTIITFIVeds pIo V LZZOTW ASM asealh oJrJ 8uo 3 T 9X 10 9 T DX Unud ILION 354 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications yeu UOLO IdV 9U PUL V OS6OZN SSM UOPIYP dS p10 JO sjuswesMbeI ayy Joour ATUO p u lO uSuy ATOYepULUT JOU ST IO 1OJOUL pu jq IN YJU S IO MJ YJU S JO SNy osuel guyeIodo ewou S yONsdIp y UO uonearpur y Aq Jas aq pmoys eas pmyy pue pmy uorssrusuerg Jo yuNoure 34L T 009 yueg ur ue ym p ddmb jt pue 9ZIs I J009 uo peseq Area Lew suoyeordde swog Ayede qy AIp eunxoIdde Auo seyeorpuy TOART pry 1991109 MSU 0 BPTYaA SuTJeIedoO Jaye Teas PMY sy JUA IOJ009 yuegg ur ue YIM peddmbe st uorsstusuel penueur pseds g L VoeJAMNS PPA V UO IPUPA UIA JOY T M Y JO W070q Y 0 UOISSTUSULIJ Y SUHJ Aq P UTULI J Pp st Ajloedeo Yor IIMS oseulep UOI
28. USA fus Entertainment Systems DVD player controls ee d ies Hs la 1 Headphone control A B Press to select either the A or B headphone source Then press MEDIA to select the desired playing media for that headset When a headphone channel has been selected A or B selections will affect the source on that channel only Note Headphone A can access any possible media AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Headphone B can only access DVD and DVD AUX For further information refer to Single play Dual play later in this section 2 BE A Stop Eject Press once Ga to stop and press a second time to eject a disc from the DVD system 3 dd Reverse Press and release for the previous chapter or track Press and hold to reverse search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 48 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 P Fast forward Press and release for the next chapter or track Press and hold to forward search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 5 B gt 11_ Play Pause Press a Play to select DVD mode and to turn the DVD system on if it is off If a disc is present it will resume or begin to play Press Pause while playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD 6 On Off Press to turn the DVD system On Off 7 VIDEO Press repeatedly to cycle thro
29. USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints An infant in a rear facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag is turned off Turning the passenger airbag back on The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON 2 The OFF light will briefly OFF illuminate when the ignition is turned to On This indicates that the passenger airbag is operational at PASSENGER AIRBAG If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON have the passenger airbag switch serviced at your authorized dealer immediately The passenger side airbag should always be ON the airbag OFF light should not be illuminated unless the passenger is a person who meets the requirements stated either in Category 1 2 or 3 of the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes When you turn OFF your airbag you not only lose the protection of the airbag you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system which was designed to work with the airbag If you are not a person who meets the requirem
30. and GA floor defrost 6 Sf Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents ie A Distributes air through the floor vents 8 JH Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents 9 7s Distributes air through the instrument panel vents 10 Manual override controls Allows you to manually select where airflow is directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 11 Fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to automatic fan operation press AUTO 12 EXT Press to display outside temperature Press again to display cabin temperature settings 13 OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate 14 Driver temperature control Press to increase decrease the driver side temperature in the vehicle cabin 15 AUTO To engage automatic temperature control press AUTO and select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 16 4 Heated seat controls Press to turn the heated seats on and off The heated seats automatically turn off after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned off 77 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls Dual Automatic Temperature Control DATC system o
31. mark or feature Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground 2 and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter long horizontal line on the wall or screen 1 at this height masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps and open the hood 4 Locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern and place the top edge of the intensity zone even with the horizontal reference line 4 If the top edge of the high intensity area is not even with the horizontal line follow the next step to adjust it 5 Locate the vertical adjuster 2 for each headlamp Adjust the aim by turning the adjuster control s either clockwise to adjust up or counterclockwise to adjust down 6 In addition to the horizontal line marked in step 2 a pair of vertical P lines 5 must be marked at the center line of the headlamps on the wall or screen 7 On the wall or screen locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment If the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line follow the next step to adjust it 8 Locate the horizontal adjuster 1 for each headlamp Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to place the left edge of the high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment sa 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide
32. post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Vertical aim adjustment aerodynamic headlamps The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted Your vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments To adjust the headlamps 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 8 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the center of your headlamp indicated by a 3 0 mm circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that lamp hits the wall 4 On the wall or screen you will LFF observe a light pattern with a Ge distinct horizontal edge towards the es right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line gt l x 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp then use a E5 Torx socket to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise to adjust down or clockwise to adjust up aligning the upper edge of the light pattern up to the horizontal line 6 Repeat Steps 3 5 for th
33. 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Notice to owners of diesel powered vehicles Read the 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and maintenance of your Diesel powered light truck Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or death Be sure to read Driving off road with truck and utility vehicles in the Driving chapter Using your vehicle with a snowplow For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a snowplow refer to Snowplowing in the Driving chapter Using your vehicle as an ambulance If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Packa
34. HYS IJeIdIOJON s3ILI9VdY ANY SNOILV IHIJdS LONQOYd AONVNALNIVIN poddinbe jt pmy yong pue py syerg N LO oO Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications quawajddngy IPIND s 4aung JASOU OQANJ WOUYIACUT JOOAUT AYOMG LANOT 4 IT 9 0 9 BY 0 IJOY JIEN Uone IdV Pue V 0OE6GOCNW SSM peuep cIdSTOSMS OX9 SM dS 0ZMS OX epeurD TO IOJO W umuq Jedng OG MG AVS Yeros10joW SN TO 1010 pus g oneyqudAS UMUWI OGMG AVS Yeo10 0 quawajddng IPIND s 4aung 1 SUA OQANJ WOUYIALUT JOAAUT AYOMG LANOT LAWT 9 0 9 BY 0 Jajoy TV ISEL6NW SSM TL94 UOTIVITFIVeds pIo Jeaquinu 1ed pIo pa 10foo moTaA quR OOD susug Ploy UMTUIIG YLeIDIOJON CIP TST suoyes 0 OF 16 EF TL suoyes 0 8E 19ST suoyes 0g T16 TL suo es 0 6T 199 s tenb 0 4 1093 syrenb G g opxe YY yue PNA xoq Suo yue pny xoq Mog Yue pna qe sisseyp uo Teuondo yueg drys pi Yue fon g2 UISU aserp esueyo Jey sepnypoul po eulsuq SOUSU seS OTA 18 9 pue 8A Tr g suey 1OY sepnypoul po sulsuq dUISUd J S P quejooo jony pue sulsuqy oulsue OTA T9 9 Juejood suTsuy 353 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications esueyo yuswo ALY TOY 90W91 PMI dS oNOOQYAN YLIIOJON Sepnpout CI9 9T uorssrusueag oewromy syrenb GyT dS eNOOUAWN dS0 95LX PA
35. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Overdrive with Tow Haul OFF D Overdrive with Tow Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through five D Overdrive with Tow Haul ON The Tow Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load All transmission gear ranges are available when using Tow Haul To activate Tow Haul press the button on the end of the gearshift o l GS TOWHAUL lt I The TOW HAUL indicator light will TOW illuminate in the instrument cluster HAUL Tow Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting Tow Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the transmission is in the D Overdrive position this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a grade Depending on driving conditions and load conditions the transmission may downshift slow the vehicle and control the vehicle speed when descending a hill without the accelerator pedal being pressed The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed 242 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving To deactivate the Tow Haul feature and return to normal driving mode press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The
36. T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Lao Location of the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label You will find a Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your v
37. Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean 307 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine YAS Q AV MSS en e 6 8L V10 gasoline engine 308 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
38. This operation is considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage 322 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a m
39. Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 207 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal la
40. Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block Gn both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the tire being changed 279 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Refer to the instruction sheet located in the glove box for detailed tire change instructions Park on a level surface activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake e Automatic transmission Place gearshift lever in P Park e Manual transmission Place gearshift lever in R Reverse e Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF 4x4 Place transfer
41. and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions 231 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine starts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and or ice If this occurs the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output At the earliest opportunity clear all the snow and or ice away from the air induction inlet The following starting instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine if your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine refer to Starting the engine in your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Su
42. and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the or Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 198 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire inflation information All tires with Steel Carcass Plies if equipped This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls As such they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires Tire service including adjusting the air pressure must be performed by personnel trained supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA regulations For example during any procedure involving tire inflation the technician or individual must utilize a remote inflation device and ensure that all persons are clear of the trajectory area WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if improperly used serviced or maintained To avoid serious injury never attempt to re inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously under inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly for inspection Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect perso
43. and result in damage to internal transmission components 345 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Automatic transmission fluid filter if equipped The TorqShift automatic transmission may be equipped with fi a serviceable external fluid filter Ss mounted under the transmission bell housing as shown in the illustration TorqShift equipped vehicles which do not have the externally mounted filter will have the transmission fluid filter located inside the transmission bottom pan Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for service intervals for automatic transmission fluid and each transmission filter type See your authorized dealer for replacement 346 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Checking and adding manual transmission fluid if equipped 1 Clean the filler plug 2 Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level 3 Fluid level should be at the bottom of the opening 4 Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening au 5 Install and tighten the fill plug securely Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter 347 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Spec
44. and the fan will not operate A Distributes outside air through the floor vents GA Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents floor vents and demister vents it Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear windshield of fog and thin ice Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the G47 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm weather do not drive with the air flow selector in the O OFF position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air flow to the rear seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 2 Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort 3 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 4 Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows 71 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS IF EQUIPPED e Manual heating an
45. available COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt q SEEK SEEK P to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped oA LINE IN auxiliary audio mode if equipped and SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes satellite radio if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 26 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 5 SEEK In radio mode press lt q gt to access the previous next Gseex 7 seexe strong station In CD MP3 mode press lt gt to access the previous next CD MP3 track In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt q SEEK SEEK gt to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt q SEEK SEEK to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt SEEK SEEK gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt q SEEK SEEK p to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press E SEEK
46. backward Ensure the seat is relatched into place e Pull the handle on the side of the seat up to recline the seat e Push down the lever located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the seatback forward 152 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 40 20 40 front seat armrest and console if equipped To release the armrest pull forward on the strap and pull the armrest down To gain access to the storage compartment in your armrest lift the latch to open the lid The lid cannot be opened in the upright position Lift up armrest to return it to a center seatback 153 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Captain s chair if equipped e Lift the bar to move the seat forward or rearward Make sure that the seat is relatched into place e To recline the seatback pull the release lever handle located on the side of the seat up e Push down the lever if equipped located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the seatback forward Adjusting the front power seat if equipped A Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop f Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips t
47. belt the combination lap shoulder belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement However if you brake hard turn hard or if your vehicle receives an impact of 8 km h 5 mph or more the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement 165 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Lap belts Adjusting the lap belt The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist e Ist row center seating position on Super Cab and Crew Cab The lap belt does not adjust automatically Insert the tongue into the correct NW buckle the buckle closest to the of direction the tongue is coming 7 from To lengthen the belt turn the a tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle To tighten the belt pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use Safety belt warning light and indicator chime The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 166 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition switch illuminates 1 2 minutes
48. case in 4x4 HIGH or 4x4 LOW before turning off the engine e Manual shift transfer case 4x4 Place transfer case in 4H or 4L Location of the spare tire and tools If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire jack and associated tools refer to the following table for their locations Spare tire pick up trucks only Under the vehicle just forward of the rear bumper Jack Regular cab and Crew Cab Fastened to floor pan behind rearmost seat on passenger side Super Cab Under rear bench seat on passenger side Jack handle lug wrench lug Regular cab Fastened to floor wrench extension only available behind driver seat on Dual Rear Wheel DRW Super Cab Fastened to floor vehicles and wheel chock only under rear seat available on Single Rear Wheel Crew Cab Fastened to floor SRW vehicles equipped with a behind rear seat at driver side diesel engine Key spare tire lock jack In the glove box instruction sheet 280 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the spare tire with spare tire carrier only 1 The following tools are required to remove the spare tire e one handle extension and two Ss typical extensions To assemble I align button with hole and slide gt parts together To disconnect depress button and pull apart Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels insert the lug QD wrench extension into the lug wrench
49. covered by Ford warranty 321 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and aftermarket Motorcraft oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another brand meeting Ford specifications for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the transmission must learn its adaptive strategy As a result of this the transmission may shift firmly
50. how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank 0 0 mi under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a chime for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and chime will return within 10 minutes DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected Average fuel economy AFE Select this function to display your average fuel economy in miles gallon XXX FPG or liters km 0 0 mi N a If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another 117 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 g
51. hurt themselves When closing the moon roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening 111 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to te replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O O device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential harm or damage Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equippe
52. inserted into the FES DVD system The label may peel and cause the CD or DVD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information 63 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Playing a DVD 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the navigation system is on 3 Insert a DVD label side up into the system 4 Use the DVD bezel controls to Press to play or pause a DVD Press to stop or eject a DVD Press and release to go to the previous chapter Press and hold for a fast reverse search Press and release to go to the next chapter Press and hold for a fast forward search Press when not in menu mode to adjust brightness or when in menu mode to navigate through the menu selections Press to adjust volume levels O VOLUME Slow play 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 2 Press and hold the reverse or advance button to enter into slow play mode Once in slow play mode press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle through 1 4 and 1 2 These will display on the status bar on top of the screen as the screens cycle through at this rate 64 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt
53. is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements 256 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicle
54. leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves l When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Push down to the first detent ae E and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Push the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Window lock if equipped The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls 98 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Power rear slider window if equipped Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets ar
55. lt SEEK p will scroll through all tracks on the disc In Folder mode pressing lt q SEEK gt will scroll only through tracks within the selected folder Press lt Q FOLDER FOLDER gt to access the previous next folder if available 32 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use A IV lt q SEEK SEEK P gt to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped oA LINE IN Auxiliary audio mode if equipped SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes Satellite Radio if equipped For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 5 SEEK In radio mode press E gt to access the previous next strong station In CD MP3 mode press lt gt to access the previous next CD track In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt 4 SEEK SEEK to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt q SEEK SEEK P gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press
56. may require re adjustment e The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on the vehicle s Safety Certification Label The maximum cold inflation pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire sidewall Tire air pressure may require re adjustment within these pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow installation e Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps for snowplow equipped vehicles Consult your authorized dealer for additional information e Snowplowing with vehicles equipped with a diesel engine may result in engine overheating in highway driving with snowplow blade raised unless equipped with the special engine cooling fan clutch that is included with a snow plow package option Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven at least 500 miles 800 km The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator and may cause the engine to run at a higher temperature Attention to engine temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are above freezing Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle provides the best performance Follow the severe duty schedule in your scheduled maintenance information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals Snowplow
57. mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply j
58. must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 ON position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the 3 ON position to the 1 OFF LOCK position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the 3 ON position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 137 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry key pad autolock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp follow
59. normal operating temperature The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 C High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition 344 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick handle and also in the Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid 4 should be removed by a qualified technician An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation
60. of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire Label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry 195 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metri
61. of the tailgate close to the box 7 Pull left hand hinge straight to the right to disengage the left hand tailgate hinge socket from the left hand box pivot post 8 Lift left side off of its hinge To install follow the removal procedures in reverse order 131 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Tailgate step if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into the truck bed To open the tailgate step 1 Flip down the tailgate 2 Pull the yellow latch lever to the Unlock positon fa to release the grab handle from it s stowed postion and raise the handle upright until you feel it latch and see the latch lever in the Lock positon a The yellow lever only needs to be used when releasing the grab handle 3 Rotate the center molding to unlatch the tailgate 4 Flip open the panel to widen the step Note To reduce risk of falling e Operate step only when the vehicle is on level surface Operate step only in areas with sufficient lighting e Always open flip panel to widen step e Always use grab handle when stepping up and down e Step not intended for bare footed use e Keep step clean from contamination before use e g snow mud e Keep the step load you load below 350 Ibs 159 kg e Never drive with step deployed To close the tailgate step 1 Close the step panel then lift and fully close the t
62. oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator dipstick 4 Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn or until the cap is fully seated To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not
63. panel CLEANING a saseererssueiivtticevs deb eneetae 309 ELUTEE E EEE E 12 363 Index lighting up panel and IGETION seres neevgnszennchscsseedeaeess 82 J Jump starting your vehicle 290 K Keyless entry system 0 146 DUIGOLOGK E cv gia ET 136 programming entry code 146 WC Se costae bea cates ete ete etches 149 positions of the ignition 231 L Lamps autolamp system 10 80 daytime running light 81 fog lamps ecese ea 80 headlamps i2cscccsscesecessatseiesansts 80 headlamps flash to pass 81 instrument panel dimming 82 interior lamps 0 ccceeeeeeeeees 85 replacing bulbs 85 86 88 93 Lane change indicator see Turn signal 85 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 235 Eoad IMTS uyoga 212 Loading instructions 218 Locks AUILOLOGK aerieni 136 Child PVOO sins lec 140 TS NUTS reroror ingens 289 Lumbar support seats 155 M Manual transmission 0 244 364 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus fluid capacities 000 352 TEVELSE ocis dccxsasisccacdiandadessacseests 245 Message center 0 116 122 english metric button 126 system check button 125 warning messages 119 128 MITTOTS assiscaecds sesidsacdarcstessecssas 96 99 fold away 008 100 102 103 hated isseire 100 sid
64. parking brake then shift into 1 First 245 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving 3 Turn the ignition off Do not park your vehicle in Neutral it may move unexpectedly and injure someone Use 1 First gear and set the parking brake fully REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in reverse and when using the RSS This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground Certain add on devices such as large trai
65. programming For a complete set of SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels visit www sirius com or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 For a quick reference of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel guide refer to the Sirius Welcome Kit 40 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna Obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a contin
66. reset button 4 Turn the ignition on 5 Wait a few seconds and return the key to off 6 Make another check for leaks FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 268 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Standard Maxi Caine Fuse link maxi fuses fuses cartridge fuses a 5A Blue Bue D ce Natural Natural Ca t gt s amp s aoe a ee ee Mtwa Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located in the Ly passenger s footwell Remove the S panel cover to access the fuses C 269 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies To remove the fuse panel cover pull the panel toward you When the clips of the panel disengage let the panel fall easily To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel S cover L SIN Always disconnect the batte
67. running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy 337 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Four wheel drive operation Gf equipped is less fuel efficient than two wheel drive operation e Close windows for high speed driving EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker These numbers represent the Range of MPG L 100 km expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter
68. seconds 2 Turn ignition from the 3 ON position back to the 1 OFF LOCK position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition 3 Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 OFF LOCK position to the 3 ON position maintain ignition in the 3 ON position for at least one second but no more than ten seconds 4 Turn the ignition from the 3 ON position back to the 1 OFF LOCK position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition 5 Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 OFF LOCK position to the 3 ON position maintain ignition in the 3 ON position for at least one second but no more than ten seconds This step will program your new key to a coded key 6 To program additional new unprogrammed key s repeat Steps 1 through 5 If successful the new coded key s will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If not successful the new coded key s will not start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key s programmed 150 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23
69. set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats and safety belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing 310 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning LEATHER SEATS iF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH F 250 AND 350 CREWCAB Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather For King Ranch F 250 and F 350 CrewCab leather seats refer to separate section in this chapter e To clean use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A Dry the ar
70. sound returns You may store up to six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18 5 AM FM Press AM FM to select A AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 6 ON OFF Volume Press VOL VOL PUSH PUSH to turn ON OFF Turn VOL PUSH to increase decrease volume 7 CLK Clock Press CLK to toggle between the clock and radio Ne frequency 23 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems AM FM stereo single CD satellite compatible sound system if equipped 16 lay 14 E Qore ET sce REW FF lt FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE P il 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 J em T Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which allows you to operate the window switches and the audio for up to ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front door is opened L A V Press A V to manually go up or down the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In satellite radio mode if equipped press A v to tune to the next previous channel Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 MUTE Press to mute the Z playing media Press again to return to the playing media 24 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 MEN
71. the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture see above to within the COLD FILL RANGE on the reservoir 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and dis
72. thousand miles kilometers of operation since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada Ford Motor Company S A de C V and service and repair facilities may access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially inclu
73. tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 206 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan
74. to play If there is already a CD in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and the CD Audio Disc screen will display From this screen you can also select from COMPRESSION SHUFFLE and SCAN features To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert an MP8 disc into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and N Jj automatically begin to play If there is already a disc in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and DVD MP3 FOLDERI TRACK7 00 24 gt the MP3 Audio Disc screen will display and allow you to access the PeNono gt COMPRESSION SHUFFLE SCAN and FOLDER MODE features COMP SHUFFLE SCAN BACK 45 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Press the power button to turn the DVD system on The indicator light next to the power button will illuminate 3 Connect an auxiliary audio video source by connecting RCA cords G 2 3 4 not included to the RCA jacks on the left hand side of the system
75. when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door if equipped with memory feature Refer to Memory seats mirrors adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved 104 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience 1 Press the ON control and release it 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press the SET control and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator light 6 on the instrument cluster will turn on Note Driver Controls e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt
76. you shut off and re start your vehicle the transmission will automatically return to normal mode with Tow Haul feature deactivated For more information refer to the Driving chapter Do not use the Tow Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 95 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the Ay visor mirror lamp OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package If your vehicle is equipped with a moon roof refer to One touch moonroof later in this chapter for information on its operation Storage compartment if equipped Press the release on the door to open the storage compartment The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or a similar object and the front tab can be used for holding tickets paper envelopes etc The front bin may be used to store small objects AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet for this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power out
77. 0 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems incompatibility certain homemade compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached S adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your authorized dealer MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows CDs with homemade paper e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to T255 e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders con
78. 0 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 295 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider On 4x2 vehicles it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift On 4x4 vehicles it is recommended that your vehicle be towed using flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground However a wheel lift may be used to lift the rear of the vehicle so long as depending on vehicle configurations the following preparations are met e On Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF vehicles the 4x4 control is turned to the 2WD position prior to towing e On manual shift transfer case vehicles the front wheel hub locks are in the FREE position prior to towing Note Towing a
79. 0 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses caused by water entering into your trailer s electrical wiring Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle components adversely affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been submerged in water Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked unless a leak is suspected RECREATIONAL TOWING An example of recreational towing is towing your vehicle behind a motorhome The following recreational towing guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged configuration towing 4x4 with Transmission in Neutral manual shift Transfer case in N transfer case Neutral Hublocks set to FREE 4x4 with Transmission in neutral electronic shift Remove rear driveshaft Automatic transfer case Transfer case set to 2WD a Hublocks set to AUTO 1Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed installed only by a qualified technician See your local authorized dealer for driveshaft removal installation Improper removal installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid loss damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission components Always make sure that both hub locks are set to the same position To ensure the automatic hub locks are unlocked cycle the h
80. 002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 521 4140 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 1 800 241 3678 Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 521 4140 Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty In the United States you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your authorized dealer Similarly in Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prio
81. 3 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Note The moon roof will open to the comfort position first before opening all the way The comfort position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened To open the moon roof The moon roof is equipped with a one touch open feature Press and release the AUTO control The moon roof will open to the comfort position Press and release the control again to fully open To stop the one touch open feature press either the AUTO or W control again To close the moon roof Press and hold the W control until the glass panel stops at the comfort position Press and hold the control again until the glass stops moving the moon roof does not go to the comfort position When fully closed the rear portion of the glass panel will appear higher than the front portion To vent the moon roof Press and hold the v control The moon roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the vent position To close press and hold the AUTO control until the glass panel stops moving The moon roof has a built in sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously
82. 4L DRW Pickups Weight 12500 5670 1250 567 7 distributing 2 receiver Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight exceeds the limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle structural damage loss of vehicle control and personal injury Weight distributing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a weight distributing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and all doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 12 13 mm of the reference point After proper adjustment the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 2 222 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Adjusting a weight distributing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follo
83. 6 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure including the spare if equipped at least monthly and before long trips You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure
84. 8 SHOW ANA ICO soricinsisriesriiris 260 through water o 258 262 PAYD SYStEMV isien rusiner 43 E Electronic message CENTET Sea EATE 116 122 Emergencies roadside Jump starting ees 290 Emergency Flashers 267 Emission control system 338 BINS INE fs saceaspceeeenneisads EE 356 Cleaning siadgcecsecvecviaiessseicencescd 307 COOIATID eresie 324 diesel cesuren E E 8 fail safe cooling ee 328 idle speed control 322 refill capacities wees 352 service points i 316 317 starting after a collision 267 Engine block heater 234 Engine Oil eeceeeseeeseeeereeeees 319 checking and adding 319 GID STUCK erisera akini 319 filter specifications 321 350 recommendations ccce 321 refill capacities c 352 Exhaust fumes ccccceeeeeees 234 F Fail safe cooling ccceeee 328 Family entertainment system 43 Fluid capacities 2 0 0 0 352 POSlAIMPS scsetissccvaneventcenersaesssdeevaces 80 Four Wheel Drive vehicles 248 CeESCTIPLION 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 252 driving off road ee 254 electronic shift 248 252 indicator light 0 0 00 249 lever operated shift 250 manual locking hubs 248 preparing to drive your vehicle oe eceeccceesssceeeseeseeeenes 239 UG 5 es POORA E S E 330 calculating fuel ECONOMY erases 124 335 CAD hescepsei
85. Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada authorized dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessory The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories available for your vehicle Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your authorized dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessoriesstore com Exterior style Bug shields Chrome exhaust tips Deflectors Running boards Spla
86. D R W discs as well as audio CDs and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints scratches and cleanliness Clean with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert a DVD into the system label side up to turn on the system rD It will load automatically and begin to play If a DVD is already loaded in the system press PLAY on the DVD player The power indicator will turn on automatically indicating the DVD system is ON Press VIDEO to change the source displayed on the screen Press repeatedly to cycle through DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD OFF Press the power button to turn the system OFF The indicator light will turn off indicating the system is off Note The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers and can be adjusted by the radio volume control 44 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To play a CD in the DVD system The DVD system can play audio CDs CD R and CD R W CD ROM and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints and scratches Clean the disc with a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert a CD into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and automatically begin
87. D until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the 35 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the disc in the last slot loaded will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show TOO1 track in the display Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for further information 18 amp CD eject To eject a disc from the system press A Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc To auto eject up to 6 CDs press and hold amp until the system begins ejecting the current disc Remove the current disc and the next disc will be ejected If the current disc is not removed the system will reload the disc 19 CD slot Insert a CD MP38 label E side up Auxiliary input jack Your vehicle may be equipped with Yp an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played throu
88. Deactivation Indicator 33 10A Trailer tow brake controller Trailer tow OP M ay eger a a 272 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Description 35 10A Reverse Sensing System RSS 4x4 module 4x4 solenoid Traction control switch Tow Haul switch Diesel engine transceiver Cluster control PTC control 4x4 module Satellite radio module 41 15A Radio Electrochromatic rear view mirror M eeesvicnitumnaton 42 10A Heated seat relay coil Upfitter switch iota Mened moray l Front wiper logic Blower motor relay coil Not used spare 47 30A Circuit Power windows Moonroof Power Sliding Breaker Backlite Delayed accessory Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs 273 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter KE EJ saamecael as FARE ENA 24 25 26
89. Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy 336 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradual
90. IRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK p to view the additional display text When the gt indicator is active press lt q SEEK to view the previous display text In satellite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume b Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a CD MP3 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last 17 LOAD To load a disc into the system press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOA
91. MP3 12 q iy Speaker Headphone Single Dual Play Press to toggle between Single Play same media playing through all speakers and Dual Play headphone mode the rear speakers are muted 13 Keypad Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played 14 C Cancel Press to cancel clear the numeric input i e chapter number 15 MEDIA Press to cycle through the possible media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD LINE IN Gf equipped DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources 16 VIDEO Press to cycle through video states DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD Off 17 EJECT Press to eject a disc from the FES 18 Fast reverse Previous When a DVD is playing press and hold for a quick reverse within the DVD Press and release for the previous chapter Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume In CD MP3 mode press to access the previous track 19 MENU Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections Press MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set up menu 20 SUBTITLE DVD dependent Press to turn the subtitle feature ON or OFF 21 LANGUAGE DVD dependent Press to select the desired language 22 ENTER Press to select the highlighted menu option 23 ILLUMINATION Press to illuminate the remote control and backlight all of the buttons 52 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Ente
92. Make sure the truck receiver draw bar and coupler are properly connected and adjusted e Check rear view and side mirrors for proper visibility especially when towing trailer wider than the truck e When towing operate the vehicle at lower speeds than you would when not towing a trailer The likelihood of trailer sway is greater at higher speeds e If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant if not already so equipped Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the proper axle lubricant Remember that regardless of the rear axle lubricant used do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 112 km h with no full throttle starts e When turning make wide turns to allow trailer tires to properly clear any obstacles e Be prepared for trailer sway due to buffeting when larger vehicles pass in either direction 228 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Loading e Keep the center of gravity low for best handling e Trailer loads should be evenly distributed front to back and left to right The load distribution within the trailer should be such that 10 15 of the trail
93. NE serr ner 306 WAKING siioni daia 306 WhEEIS ceecccccccsesssceeseseseeseaes 307 wiper blades ccccccceeeeeeees 309 361 Index Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 75 Clock adjust 6 CD in dashi sisssssscsssccvsssthesivieere 31 AM FM CD scraniu 25 Clutch u LU To N E T 342 operation while driving 244 recommended shift speeds 244 Compass electronic set zone adjustment 127 CONSOLE aa aa 116 overhead e 96 Controls DPOWET SEAU sson an oak 154 steering column 0 eee 107 Coolant checking and adding 20 00 0000 324 refill capacities 0 000 000 327 352 Cruise control see Speed control n a 104 Customer Assistance 265 Ford accessories for your VEHICLE sporanan eniai 313 Ford Extended Service P eE A aAa ete ee 302 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada iiaii 303 Getting roadside assistance 265 Getting the service you TOGO E E E tees 298 Ordering additional owner s Titerature ooo 304 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Program 362 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus D Daytime running lamps see LAMPS ssecessaceshesreeescesascaaeens 81 Dipstick automatic transmission Ak OE EEEE T E 343 Engine Olles sscscdesrscnasencaacerae 319 Driveline universal joint and Slip yoke re 348 Driving under special conditions ss 243 256 259 SaN nO MEE T EE 25
94. Never use a single belt for more than one person Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident 159 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming we from until you hear a snap and feel a it latch Make sure the tongue is a EL securely fastened in the buckle 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle A Vehicle sensitive mode Combination lap and shoulder belts in normal retractor mode allow free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers Belt sensitive mode Combination lap and shoulder belts can also be
95. Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Notes Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop Adjustable head restraints if equipped The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear collision To properly adjust your head restraints lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as possible The head restraints can be moved up and down Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as 4 close as possible behind your head e f Push control to lower head restraint IN 151 f 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Full bench seat if equipped e Lift the release bar to move the seat forward or backward Ensure that the seat is relatched into place e Pull up on the lever located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the seatback forward e Pull up on the lever located at the side of the seat cushion to recline the seatback and to return the seat to the upright position 40 20 40 split bench seat if equipped e Lift the track release bar to move the seat forward or
96. Play mode To listen to the audio on wired headphones not included connect the wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD system The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left side of the FES and is labeled A A Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel A source The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on the right side of the FES and is labeled B Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel B source Adjust the headphone volume using the volume control on the DVD system VOLUME Operation Single play Dual play Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones and wired headphones not included to enable the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways Single Play Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers When the DVD system is on and the same source is playing through the front and rear speakers SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display Dual Play Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to the radio CD MP3 DVD or DVD AUX media so
97. Remover ZC 42 e For plastic headlamp lenses use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellant coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas a
98. Roadside Emergencies M14 x 1 5 150 200 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners On all two piece flat wheel nuts apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer and the nut Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage 290 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the transmission mu
99. S warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If P your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the 235 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance Parking brake To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated until the parking brake is released BRAKE Pull the release lever to release the parking brake To prevent the pedal from releasing too quickly place your left foot on the parking brake pedal then pull the release lever making sure the pedal fully releases You may want to pull the release lever again to make sure the pa
100. SA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle e We highlight do it yourself items in the engine compartment for easy location e We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning cigarettes material away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off e Automatic transmission 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels e Manual transmission 1 Set the parking brake depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 First 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels Working with the engine on e Automatic transmission 1 Set the parking bra
101. SEEK SEEK to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use W lt SEEK SEEK to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A V lt SEEK SEEK to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers 25 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV 4 SEEK SEEK gt to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers SPEEDVOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use V lt SEEK SEEK to adjust The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Track Folder mode Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In Track mode pressing lt SEEK SEEK gt will scroll through all tracks on the disc In Folder mode pressing lt SEEK SEEK P will scroll only through tracks within the selected folder Press lt Q FOLDER FOLDER to access the previous next folder if
102. SSTUSULIJ SNVI ABU pM pOPpUIWWOIJI oy ULYJ I YJO py Aue Jo SA osewep UOISSTUSULIJ SNVI AVU dS oNOOUANW SULIMba UOTSSTUISUL 1 IYCWOMEL UL UI PINT ssesn enp e JO asp PINE dS eNOOUAIW Osn ATUO pfnoys dS eNOOUAI IMD yey suotsstusuesz opeurojny TRAIOJUL VOIAIOS 4991109 dU JUIULIEJAP 0 WOUDWAO UL BDUDUAIUIDUL paynpayIs NOK 04 I J Y addy YOo1I0D ayy JO ST poppe suroq PIN oY FA 0 JOUTRJUOD oY JOYO oppuey Yousdrp oy 10 epeyq Yorsdrp oy uo poyeorpur ale SyUsWeIMbed PMY UOIsstuIsueI pesn ST PM UOSSPUSULI IYLWOME 4991109 Y MSUY gptyea INOA ul p ddmb ApeursSmo d4 Juejoo 94 PPY IoyeM U p gIowqns u q sey o Xe y ss qun suIsueYoO ImMb a Jou s op yey JUROLIQNT OTyeyJUAS L UIeJUOD Saxe IEI USISOP PLOY S AXL PIO dys poy Jo Yor aJo duroo 107 Y STLOZINALS uoryeogioedg pIo surjoour JusTeambe 10 E TX I YPONW UOT AMPPY JO TU 9EZ ZO 8 PPV ayerjusouoy qoyseay peuspum Teg suenb g g py soyseam prorysputy Umud IeIIIOJOW cV 9TE8W dsm V G amp OZ UOTIVITFIOedsS pAO 355 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 5 4L V8 engine 6 8L V10 engine 415 1 6 5 10 2 7 8 8 4 9 0 040 0 050 inch 0 040 0 050 inch 9 2 The 5 4L 3V and 6 8L 3V spark plug gap CANNOT be adjusted Drivebelt routing 5 4L V8 6 8L V10 engines 356 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owner
103. TOW HAUL light will no longer be illuminated When you shut off and restart the engine the transmission will automatically return to normal D Overdrive mode Tow Haul OFF Do not use the Tow Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 3 Third Transmission starts and operates in third gear only Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Use 2 Second to start up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e The transmission will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds it will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 First when the vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Overdrive or D Drive e Depress the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do
104. TRAILER FAULT if equipped Displayed if there is a short circuit on the electric brake output wire or the trailer brakes are drawing too much current Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TBC FAULT if equipped Displayed in response to faults sensed by the trailer brake controller TBC In the event this message is seen please take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for diagnosis and repair Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information CHECK AIR FILTER Diesel engine only Refer to Instrument Cluster in your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR Diesel engine only Displayed when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs to be drained Refer to your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for more inf
105. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 18 Entertainment Systems 22 AM FM stereo 22 AM FM stereo with CD 24 AM FM stereo with in dash six CD 30 Auxiliary input jack 36 Satellite radio information 40 Navigation system 43 Family entertainment system 43 Climate Controls 71 Heater only 71 Manual heating and air conditioning 72 Dual automatic temperature control 75 Lights 80 Headlamps 80 Turn signal control 85 Bulb replacement 85 Driver Controls 94 Windshield wiper washer control 94 Steering wheel adjustment 95 Power windows 98 Mirrors 99 Speed control 104 Upfitter controls 109 Moon roof 110 Message center 116 Tailgate 131 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Table of Contents Locks and Security Keys Locks Anti theft system Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Vehicle loading Trailer towing Trailer brake controller integrated Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Transmission operation Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher switch Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 136 136 136 148 151 151 158 171
106. U Press MENU repeatedly to access to the following settings CATEGORY satellite radio if equipped Press MENU until the currently active category appears in the display CATEGORY MODE In CATEGORY MODE press W to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press lt q SEEK SEEK B gt or SCAN to select the category After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only G e ROCK To select a different category press MENU until the category appears in the display Press A IV to select a different category You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOUR or SET MINUTES is displayed Use W lt SEEK SEEK to adjust the hours minutes AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use W lt SEEK SEEK to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use W lt
107. USA fus 105 Driver Controls Resuming a set speed Press the RES resume control and release it This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Up function Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Down function Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached press the SET control 106 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control e Depress the brake pedal This will not erase your vehicle s previously set speed e Press the speed control OFF control Note When you turn o
108. W FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and tone will return within 10 minutes 0 0 mi DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected 123 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Average fuel economy AFE Select this function from the INFO menu to display your average fuel vyv f economy in miles gallon or liters 100 XX X MPO km OO mi If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled since last fill up by gallons of fuel used multiply liters used by 100 then divide by kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future referenc
109. XXXXXXXXXXXX or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 214 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label axle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer EOS GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers 215 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum Sample Safety Compliance Certification Label Refer to ac
110. a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information 216 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 lb 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 Ib 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 lb 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 Ib 782 to 1 304 kg Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occ
111. ack of the seat and pull tether loop out of the rubber band securing it 190 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child seat To provide a tight tether strap 1 Route the tether strap through the loop directly behind the child seat 2 Attach the strap hook onto the loop behind an adjacent seating position 3 Install the child safety seat tightly using the vehicle belts Follow the instructions in this chapter 4 Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat For example the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear seats 191 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Uti
112. adside Emergencies chapter 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before L i touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE During the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving maintain speeds below 70 mph 112 km h and vary speeds frequently This is recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in Do not tow a trailer or use your vehicle to snowplow until it has been driven at least 500 miles 800 km Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information on towing a trailer and Snowplowing in the Driving chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils during the first few
113. ailgate step into the tailgate 2 Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle then lower the handle Note e Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle e Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed 132 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e Replace slip resistance tape serviceable item if worn out e Replace handle molding serviceable item if damaged e Do not tow with grab handle or step frame Bed extender if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the truck bed Note This feature is not intended for off road usage To open the bed extender into Tailgate Mode 1 Pull the locking pin toward the center of the vehicle 2 Rotate the storage hinge rearward to unlatch the panels 133 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 3 Rotate the panels toward the tailgate if 4 Connect the two panels then rotate both knobs a quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels 5 Ensure the latch rod is inserted into the tailgate hole and the locking pins on both sides are engaged into Va EE their holes in the pick up box EE ce 6 Reverse steps for storage of the a bed extender oe E 134 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Note When the vehicle is in mo
114. allon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the SELECT RESET control switch press and hold for 2 seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings Setup menu Press and hold the SELECT RESET _ control switch to get into the HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU sequence from the T TEN INFO MENU for the following SETUP MENU displays e Units English Metric e Language e Reset to English if in another language see Note below Note When returning to the SETUP menu and a non English HOLD RESET FOR language has been selected HOLD Ni RESET FOR ENGLISH will be ENGLISH displayed to change back to English Press and hold the SELECT RESET control to change back to English Units English Metric 1 Select this function from the SETUP MENU for the current units UNITS to be displayed lt ENG gt fETRIC 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET control switch to change from English to Metric 3 Press the SELECT RESET control switch for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than 4 seconds to return to the INFO MENU 118 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Language Note When entering the SETUP MENU and a non En
115. and hold lt q SEEK SEEK gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt q SEEK SEEK B gt to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 gt II Play Pause This control is operational in CD MP3 mode When a CD MP3 is playing press to pause or play the current CD The CD status will display in the radio display If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the DVD supplement for further information 33 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 7 SHUFFLE In CD MP3 mode ie press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER In folder mode press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In fold
116. and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting 338 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the Check engine light C charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engi
117. and shoulder safety belt in the Regular Cab center seating position or in the Super Cab Crew Cab rear center seating positions Regular Cabs with a center 20 seat or Crew Cabs with a rear 60 40 split bench If you carry large cargo behind the seat or items that might damage or soil the belt detach the belt from the seat 1 Release the mini buckle by inserting a key or safety belt tongue into the slot 163 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Insert the belt into the clip on the back panel Protect the stowed belt if you carry cargo this may damage or soil the belt If the belt has been disconnected to carry large objects behind the seat reconnect it as follows 1 Remove the belt from the stowage clip on the back panel 2 Buckle the small tongue on the end of the belt into the mini buckle on the driver s side The belt is now ready for use This mini buckle should stay buckled at all times unless cargo carrying makes it necessary to detach the belt Safety belt with cinch tongue Regular Cab center seating positions and Super Cab Crew Cab rear center seating positions The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt is stowed or while putting safety belts on When the lap shoulder safety belt is buckled the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be shortened but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getti
118. and the is turned to the ON position warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds The driver s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and while the indicator light is warning chime turn off illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off to the ON position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster The driver s safety belt is not The Belt Minder feature is buckled before the vehicle has activated the safety belt warning reached at least 3 mph 5 km h light illuminates and the warning and 1 2 minutes have elapsed chime sounds for 6 seconds every since the ignition switch has been 30 seconds repeating for turned to ON approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled The driver s safety belt is buckled The Belt Minder feature will not while the safety belt indicator light activate is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is buckled The Belt Minder feature will not before the ignition switch is turned activate to the ON position
119. annel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gif equipped CD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources Note Refer to Single play Dual play for more information Using the infrared IR wireless headphones 1 Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON 2 Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B control on the ear piece 3 Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece Using wired headphones not included Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves 1 Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either side of the DVD system Each side is labeled A Aor A B Headphones plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into jack B will listen to Channel B 2 Adjust the volume levels using the volume controls on the DVD system To adjust display brightness To decrease increase the brightness level on the display screen press the brightness control on the DVD system A display will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness level The brightness display will only appear when the menu is not displayed 47 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt
120. ans the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries it may also cause minor abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 174 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If the air bag
121. ars or 60 000 miles 100 000 km whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury vehicles and six years or 70 000 miles 110 000 km on Lincoln vehicles Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except Ford GT which has a tire inflation kit battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 km Trailers shall be covered up to 100 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 265 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2
122. ason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat the safest place for children to ride Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 183 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat Never put the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position the buckle closest to the direction the tongue i
123. battery 292 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Do not use fuel lines engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 293 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 294 2008 F 25
124. be found on either the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 209 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual 1b kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 210 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires
125. be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern 255 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
126. bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position 2 Remove the screw and lens from the lamp assembly 3 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Install the bulb s in reverse order Replacing foglamp bulbs if equipped 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is 7 in the OFF position f 2 Remove the bulb socket from the N foglamp by turning o 4 counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb Install the new bulb s in reverse order 92 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper To change the license plate lamp bulbs 1 Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb 2 Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and carefully pull to remove it from the lamp assembly 3 Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 4 Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise 93 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Push the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick push and hold the wipe
127. c tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required 19
128. car 254 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Maintain steering wheel control at all times especially in rough terrain Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside Do not grip the spokes Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving Map out your route before driving in the area To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling not sliding or spinning Basic operating principles e Do not use 4WD on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may
129. case with the floor mounted shifter For increased fuel economy in 2WD rotate both hub locks to the FREE position e For proper operation make sure that each hub is fully engaged and that both hub locks are set to the same position both set to LOCK or both set to FREE To engage LOCK turn the hub locks completely clockwise to disengage the hubs FREE turn the hub locks completely counterclockwise Some vehicles may be equipped with wheel ornaments that cover the 4x4 manual hub lock These ornaments must be removed to access the manual hub locks Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF 4x4 system if equipped If equipped with the electronic shift 4WD System and the instrument panel control is moved to 4X4 LOW while the vehicle is moving above 5 mph 8 km h the system will not engage and no damage will occur to the 4WD system Before 4X4 LOW can be 248 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving engaged the vehicle speed must be below 5 mph 8 km h with the brake pedal depressed and the transmission in N Neutral If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the clutch pedal also must be depressed This vehicle is equipped with a non synchronous low range gearset which will not allow the transfer case to shift into 4X4 LOW if vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h It is recommended that a shift to 4X4 LOW is performed while the vehicle is rolling at a speed below 5 mph Th
130. ced install new fasteners many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing 238 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving torque features which may not be re used Never re use a bolt or nut Torque fasteners to specifications in Workshop Manual A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull TRACTION LOK AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface Under normal conditions the Traction Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
131. ced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph 55 km h point indicated on the speedometer 203 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle
132. ch seatback is not intended to support a cargo load in the forward folded position To fold the seatback down pull down the latch lever located on the bottom seat back to fold the seat back forward To flip the seat cushion up pull up on the lever located on the side of the seat cushion to rotate the cushion up until it locks into a vertical storage position gaining access to the grocery hook located on the underside of the driver side seat cushion The maximum load is 25 lb 11 kg Returning the seat to seating position e Pull lever on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage position e Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 157 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To gain access to the cupholders and tray pull down on the armrest To gain access to the 60 40 load floor store the cushion in the upright locked position Pull up on the straps located at the sides of the load floor and rotate forward until resting on the carpet SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precaut
133. cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 4 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle O from the wiper arm Push the lock pin manually to release the blade e and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard 3 Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance 318 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter 5 To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL 927
134. cs of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling if equipped If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain 328 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area N e The message center will indicate amp the engine is overheating e The Check engine indicator 1 will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still o
135. d Pull off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Do not expose the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment System FES Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and or compartments Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and or cables when not in use Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene paint thinner or any other solvent Federal Communication Commission FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device 68 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems p
136. d air conditioning system e Manual heating and air conditioning system with heated mirrors e Manual heating and air conditioning system with heated mirrors and heated seats 72 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 2 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents only to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle ps Distributes air through the instrument panel vents lt A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents O OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate A Distributes air through the floor vents GA Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents X Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents Can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield 4 O Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to c
137. d pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard a 6 Allow the belt to retract The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and x pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with knee on the child seat 8 Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt 9 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation 10 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps two through nine Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use 187 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Attaching child safety seats with tether straps Most new forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for in
138. d vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 112 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons releasing only when the A indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not repeat Step 1 to program additional hand held transmitters to the remaining two HomeLink buttons This will erase previously programmed hand held N transmitter signals into HomeLink 7 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and AT hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held tra
139. ded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs 278 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire If 4WD operation is necessary do not operate above speeds of 10 mph 16 km h or for distances above 50 miles 80 km 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e
140. ding information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled e how far Cif at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e how fast the vehicle was traveling and e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and Ford Motor Company S A de C V do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and Ford Motor Company S A de C V 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction Vehicle Modification Data Recording Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and or transmission damage refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle s Warranty Guide for more information Some vehicles are equipped with Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about vehicle modifications that increase horsepower and torque output this information cannot be erased and will stay in the system s memor
141. e It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings Drive timer Elapsed travel timer Select this function from the INFO menu to display a timer XX XX XX To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive 0 0 mi Time perform the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer 124 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Setup menu Press this control for the following displays e System Check e Units English Metric e Autolamp Timer Presets Cif equipped Autolock On Off Gf equipped e Compass calibration e Language Reset to English Gf in another language see Note below Note When returning to the SETUP menu and a non English HOLB RESET FOR language has been selected HOLD xi RESET FOR ENGLISH will be ENGLISH displayed to change back to English Press and hold the RESET control to change back to English System check Selecting this function from the SETUP menu causes the message DOESS RESET center to cycle through each of the EAD SUS CHECK systems being monitored For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for three seconds Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each
142. e High shift efforts may be encountered when attempting to shift into and out of 4x4 modes It is recommended to allow the vehicle to roll at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h when shifting Note Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 system shifts or engages This is normal In order to reduce engagement noise it is recommended that all shifts be performed at speeds below 5 mph 8 km h 2H 2WD For general on road driving Sends power to the rear wheels only 4H 4x4 High For winter and off road conditions Sends power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement N Neutral Only used when towing the vehicle 4L 4x4 Low For low speed off road applications that require extra power such as steep grades deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water Sends power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Shifting from 2H 2WD to 4H 4x4 High Engage the locking hubs by rotating the hub lock control from FREE to LOCK then move the transfer case lever from 2H 2WD to 4H 4x4 High at a stop or a vehicle speed below 5 mph 8 km h e For proper operation make sure that both indicator arrows on the hub are aligned and that both hubs are set to LOCK 250 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e Do not shift into 4H 4x4 High with the rear wheels 2H slipping H Shifting from 4H 4x4 High to 2H 2WD
143. e doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been exited Perimeter lamps illuminated entry With the Remote Keyless Entry system the following items will illuminate when the unlock control on the transmitter is pressed e Headlamps e Parklamps e Tail lamps 144 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security The lamps will automatically turn off e if the ignition switch is turned to the 3 ON position or e the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter lock control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad Gf equipped or e after 25 seconds of illumination Note On some vehicles the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature will not activate in daylight conditions Deactivating activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry You may enable disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by your authorized dealer You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to enable disable the perimeter lamps feature Note Before starting ensure the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 ON position 2 Press the power door unlock control on
144. e warning lights refer to Instrument Cluster in your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for detailed information on their function High beams I lluminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on 16 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Diesel warning lights e Glow plug pre heat OT e Water in fuel TRIP XXX X Be O 0mi _ TRIP XXX X O 0 mi e Low oil pressure Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking brake ON warning chime Sounds when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km If the warning remains on after the parking brake is off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Turn signal chime Sounds when the turn signal lever has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 2 miles 3 2 km Message center activation chime Sounds when some warning messages appears in the message center display for the first time Overspeed chime if equipped Sounds when the vehicle speed reaches 120 km h 75 mph
145. e 4WD system e provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is moving is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that allows you select 2WD 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation e uses auto manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected e auto manual hub locks can be manually overridden by rotating the hub lock control from AUTO to LOCK if desired e automatic operation of the hub locks is recommended and will increase fuel economy e For proper operation make sure that each hub is fully engaged and that both hub locks are set to the same position both set to LOCK or both set to AUTO To engage LOCK turn the hub locks completely clockwise to engage AUTO turn the hub locks completely counterclockwise AWD system indicator lights The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following conditions If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible e 4x4 HIGH momentarily 4x4 illuminates after the engine is started Illuminates when 4H 4x4 HIGH High or 4L 4x4 Low is engaged 249 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e 4x4 LOW momentarily 4x4 illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position LOW Iluminates when 4L 4x4 Low is engaged Using a Manual Shift On Stop MSOS 4x4 system if equipped Not
146. e audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persist replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion 37
147. e beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the 3 ON position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the 3 ON position to the 1 OFF LOCK position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the 3 ON position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry key pad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position 1 2 Gea 6 89 79 Z 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8a second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 139 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the s
148. e ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability Procedure for adjusting GAIN Note This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 80 40 km h 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in the trailer connection indicator will illuminate green on the TBC and the GAIN setting display will illuminate 4 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point A GAIN setting of 6 0 is a good starting point for heavier loads 5 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 80 40 km h and squeeze the manual control lever completely 6 If the trailer wheels lock up indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock up If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 Explanation of instrument cluster messages The TBC interacts wi
149. e not in the proximity of the window openings e Press the right side of the control to open the window e Pull the right side of the control to close the window lt ee REAR WINDOW Accessory delay if equipped With accessory delay the window switches may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until any front door is opened INTERIOR MIRRORS The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an inside rear view mirror which has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare 99 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse when the mirror is on to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the inside rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirro
150. e other headlamp 7 Close the hood and turn off the lamps 84 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus TURN SIGNAL CONTROL e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal MAP LAMPS IF EQUIPPED The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on and e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF BULBS Headlamp condensation The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure When moist air enters the headlamp s through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur This condensation is normal and will clear within 45 minutes of headlamp operation Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently Function Number of Trade number bulbs Headlamps aerodynamic H13 9008 Headlamps sealed beam H6054 Park lamp with aerodynamic 2 3157A or 3157AK headlamp Park lamp with sealed beam 2 4157K 3157 headlamp 85 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Function Number of Trade number bulbs Tail stop turn sidemarker 2 4157K or 3157 e R Tail stop turn sidemarker 2 3157 Cera a l a Back up Pick ups only 2 3156 or 3156K Back up Chassis cabs only 2 3157 P06 P06 Front cl
151. e switches will only operate while the ignition is in the 3 ON position whether the engine is running or not It is however recommended that the engine remain running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for extended duration or higher current draws This is even more important for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining battery power when the ignition key is in the 3 ON position When switched on by the operator they provide 10 amps 15 amps or 30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or commercial uses If your vehicle is equipped with this option there will also be a relay box located on the driver side end of the instrument panel See your authorized dealer for service 109 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls The relays are coded as shown in the accompanying illustration There will also be one power lead for each switch found as a blunt cut and sealed wire located below the instrument panel and to the left of the steering column They are coded as follows Violet with Green Trace More detailed information about the Upfitter switches can be found in the Upfitter Switches bulletin found at www fleet ford com truckbbas non html Q117 pdf ONE TOUCH MOON ROOF IF EQUIPPED The moon roof control is located on the overhead console 110 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f2
152. e vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7 pin connector in the bumper If the message is only displayed with a trailer connected the problem is related to the trailer wiring consult your trailer dealer for assistance This can be a short to ground i e chaffed wire or a short to voltage i e pulled pin on trailer emergency break away battery or trailer brakes drawing too much current Note Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred however if the fault is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford warranty Points to Remember e Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first time Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC according to procedure above whenever road weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from those that existed when the gain was initially set The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the GAIN Misuse such as application during trailer sway could cause instability of trailer and or tow vehicle 226 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions The TBC does not provide anti lock control of the trailer wheels Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle e T
153. e view mirrors power 100 signal cscs szsncdssacacsnecsadieuastnececeeee 103 MOON TOOT sscsdakis nee 110 Motorcraft parts sssri 330 350 N Navigation system c eeee 43 0 Octane rating 0 334 Oil see Engine oil 0 0 319 Overdrive ooo eeececcetsecessetseseeseeees 95 P Parking Drake ces iiss cavesciaveatise 236 Parts see Motorcraft parts 350 Pedals see Power adjustable foot pedals ssigsirurarosii 104 Power adjustable foot pedals 104 Power distribution box SEE FUSES enseina 273 Power door locks cccceeee 136 Power mirrors oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 100 Power point cee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 96 Power steering ssrismossersssiess 238 fluid checking and adding 340 fluid refill capacity 0 0 0 0 352 Power Windows c ccccceeeeeeeees 98 Preparing to drive your Vehicle cccccccceeeeees 239 R Radi siscissisiicsssdisacieviectiowes 22 24 30 Rear seat entertainment SYSTE deseri nates risian REE 43 Relays woe eeeccceccecessesceeesseeeeesseeeenes 268 Remote entry system 0 141 illuminated entry 144 146 locking unlocking doors 136 Reverse sensing system 246 Roadside assistance 00c0 265 S Safety Belt Maintenance 170 Safety belts see Safety restraints 158 160 162 164 Safety defects YEPOTUING ss scncsscsesecveersnsevene 304 305 Safety restraints 0 00 158 160 162 164
154. ea with a soft cloth e To help maintain its resiliency and color use the Motorcraft Deluxe Leather Care Kit ZC 11 D available from your authorized dealer e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating on the seat Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F 250 AND F 350 CREWCAB ONLY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top grain leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading of the material Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a m
155. earance lamps 2 and 194 From ideniteadonamgs To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer Dual rear wheels or if equipped Replacing headlamp bulbs aerodynamic Do bo on 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood 86 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 2 Remove the four bolts from the top side and bottom front of the headlamp assembly 3 Pull the assembly straight out disengaging two snap clips to fender 4 Disconnect the electrical connector by squeezing the release tab and pushing the connector forward and then pulling it rearward 5 Remove the bulb assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Install the new bulb s in reverse order 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 87 Lights Replacing park turn and sidemarker lamp bulbs aerodynamic 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood 2 Remove the four bolts from the
156. ed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Autounlock feature if equipped The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is in the 3 ON position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the 1 OFF LOCK or 2 ACC position and e the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the 1 OFF LOCK or 2 ACC position Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features deactivated there are three methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure if equipped 138 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds befor
157. ed conditions on a specified 194 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 11 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA AB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature AB C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level
158. efrost Demist Ad ry gt J 2 OOG eu oe 2 Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Bones Windows a Power Window Lockout Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage i Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm s Engine Oil Engine Coolant Breme Coolant Temperature Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Explosive Gas A Fan Warning Battery Acid Maintain Correct Fluid Power Steering Fluid Level TH 85 D gt LI ir Ge B Emission System Engine Air Filter O Passenger Compartment 3 gt So Air Filter one Diede raii wW Low Tire Pressure l p Warning 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission SELECT RESET APRND321 Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the 12 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster bulbs work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light description for additional information Note Some Warning Lights are reconfigurable telltale RTT indica
159. ehicle 211 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Do not use snow chains on front tires of vehicles with 20 wheels and tires The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e Use only SAE Class S chains e Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads e The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxim
160. ehicle can be limited either by volume capacity Chow much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 213 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only CARGO Cargo Weight including cargo TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs 7 MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 Ps ADDITIONAL SPARE 7145 80D16 420 KPA 60PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL XX FRONT XX REAR x NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE see ownens MANUAL DIMENSIONS PRESSION A FROID SE OMAERE Mall LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI ee CONSULTER LE GUIDE LT225 75A 16 5E 200KPA 29 Psi OUPROPRIETAIRE T145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXX
161. eless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button AT Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate 2 C C operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot AT be erased e Press and hold the two outer C O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds V HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 2 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 115 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Control
162. elt warning light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by 3 seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again 5 After receiving confirmation the deactivation activation procedure is complete Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is a 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611022 This assembly can be obtained from your authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All safety belt 170 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints assemblies including retractors buckles front seat belt buckle assemblies buckle sup
163. ence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 2 in the Programming section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may AT automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Steps 1 and 2 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 3 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 3 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal e Proceed with Step 4 in the Programming section 114 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Operating the HomeLink Wir
164. ends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 80 1 400 1 100 150 150 lb Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 6 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home
165. ental U S based satellite radio service that broadcasts over 120 channels of music sports news and entertainment coast to coast A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e SIRIUS online media player access providing access to all 100 commercial free music channels over the internet Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to obtain login instructions and your password For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 41 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No act
166. ents stated in the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 177 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If your vehicle has rear seats always transport children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat Always use safety belts and child restraints properly If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be transported in front the passenger airbag must be turned OFF This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an airbag than without To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries airbags must open with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle especially in the front seat This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide If you choose to deactivate your airbag you are losing the very significant risk reducin
167. er mode ea press lt q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if folders are available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF EF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to Ga manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a Cw pee Pe station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset control until sound returns You may store up to six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and CD MP3 mode press and hold for a 2 seconds to activate mode to hear a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop 34 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems In CD MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title and file name if available In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the S
168. er or park turn by turning it counterclockwise Top view of assembly shown 5 Pull the old bulb out from the socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order 90 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing brake tail turn back up lamp bulbs Pick ups only 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position and then open the tailgate to expose the lamp assemblies 2 Remove the two bolts from the tail lamp assembly and carefully pull the lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar by releasing the two retaining tabs 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing brake tail turn back up lamp bulbs Chassis cabs only 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position 2 Remove the four screws and the lamp lens from lamp assembly 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb 91 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing cargo lamp and high mount brakelamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position 2 Remove the two screws and lamp assembly from vehicle as wiring permits 3 Remove the bulb socket by rotating counterclockwise 4 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Front clearance and identification lamp
169. er to the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 208 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can
170. er vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the transmission transfer case or front axle are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary Driving through deep water may damage the transmission 258 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant should be replaced After driving through
171. er weight is on the hitch 15 25 for fifth wheel or gooseneck towing e Never exceed truck trailer receiver ball tongue tire or coupler loading recommendations Braking e The trailer brakes must be inspected and serviced at intervals specified by the manufacturer This includes the shoes drum and trailer brake magnets Electric brakes also require periodic adjustment to keep the shoes properly spaced If the brakes get hot when driving or if they will not hold chances are that they need adjustment Anticipate the need to stop allow much more distance and time to stop than normal Do not apply the trailer brakes for extended periods of time as they can overheat and lose effectiveness Backing up e Practice backing up particularly if you are a novice Turn the steering wheel to the right to move the trailer s rear end to the right e Sharp steering movements may cause the trailer to jackknife or go out of control Tires e All trailer tires should be of the same size and construction e Select tires that meet the trailer loading requirements e Always check tow vehicle and trailer tire pressure before towing Launching or retrieving a boat When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper 229 2008 F 250 35
172. ers Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description e a nee nun Rur Start relay ESOF relay hi lo p49 p S0AY Wiper motor ____ 30A PCM relay coil PCM relay Gasoline engines only PBL Not used OOO OS ME a i Relay PCM power bus Fuses 68 70 72 74 76 a a 5b4 Rda Starter solenoid ssi solenoid 55 Rely Trailer tow park lamps Trailer tow battery charge 57 Relay Power Distribution Box PDB bus fuses 67 69 71 73 75 77 pp me SJB Run Start bus Fuses 29 37 46 59 Relay PCM power bus Fuses 68 70 72 74 76 BY a 60 Diode Starter relay Gasoline engines only P65 iNet used SCSCS S 276 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description Location Rating 66 Noted S P67 Noted S P68 Noted S o 69 Notsed o 70 10A Gasoline engines A C clutch relay coil Refrigerant Containment Switch Heated PCV Diesel engine A C clutch relay coil Clutch switch Fuel pump cooler A C cycle pressure switch Run Start power 72 15A Gasoline engines Ignition coils pT oicscvsnginesEnane Tex PBT Noted o O Gasoline engines VPWR HEGO CMS MAFS EVMV CMCV VCT IMTV Diesel engine VPWR Engine loads 76 20A Gasoline engines VPWR PCM pL Biserengmer eum wor Cartridge fuses Mini fuses CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
173. ervicing authorized dealer Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury 13 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Airbag readiness If this light fails e to illuminate when ignition is turned to RUN continues to flash or TN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A BeltMinder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the BeltMinder chime feature Engine oil pressure lluminates when the oil pressure falls below the Lo normal range Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Chargi
174. es after the ignition has turned off or until either front door has opened A v Tune Disc selector In radio mode press to manually go up A or down W the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In menu mode use to select various settings In CD MP3 mode press to select the desired disc Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 MUTE Press to mute the Z playing media Press again to return to the playing media 30 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access to the following settings CATEGORY satellite radio if equipped Press MENU until the currently active category appears in the display CATEGORY MODE In CATEGORY MODE press A IV to scroll through the list of available Sirius channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press lt SEEK gt or SCAN to select the category After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK To select a different category press MENU until the category appears in the display Press A IV to select a different category You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available Sirius categories and channels Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscript
175. eservoir 7 Brake fluid reservoir 8 Engine coolant reservoir 9 Air filter assembly 10 Power distribution box 316 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 6 8L V10 gasoline engine 1 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2 Battery 3 Transmission fluid dipstick automatic transmission 4 Engine oil filler cap 5 Engine oil dipstick 6 Power steering fluid reservoir 7 Brake fluid reservoir 8 Engine coolant reservoir 9 Air filter assembly 10 Power distribution box 317 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID lt 7 Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellant type fluid or bug wash as this may cause a squeaking chattering noise streaking or smearing Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide
176. ess DVD and AUX modes They MB cannot access radio sources Audio displays Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system Status messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status Some possible radio display messages e SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY e DVD LOAD e DVD MENU e DVD STOP Audio interaction You can then also use the front audio controls to advance reverse play and pause a DVD While a DVD is playing you may use the following controls on the front radio e SEEK Press to advance to the previous lt Q or next B DVD chapters e gt II Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD When the radio displays DVD MENU press PLAY on the radio memory preset 6 to play the disc Parental control for the DVD system Your Family Entertainment System FES allows you to have control over the rear seat controls in a few different ways The DVD system is automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON which allows the rear seat passengers to use the DVD system There are three levels of control of the FES buttons The states are OVIOWIWOCI FULL enabled LOCAL or LOCKED disabled To change the level of control press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously The three states are described as 66 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt
177. everal times 5 Turn the engine off 6 Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir Do not add fluid if the level is between the MIN and MAX range 7 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it is between the MIN and MAX range Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir 341 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID e Vacuum boost system e Hydroboost system The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of your brake system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately CLUTCH FLUID IF EQUIPPED Check the clutch fluid level Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the service interval schedules Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specifications Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 342 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Carefully read cautionary information on product label For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION contact a physician or Poison Control Center immediately on Ford Moto
178. everse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset control until sound returns You may store up to six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and Ea CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In CD MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK gt to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press lt q SEEK to view the previous display text 28 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems In satel
179. f possible The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience 4 Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened Try to push or pull then turn the tire to be sure it will not move Loosen and retighten if necessary Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire 5 Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure every six months per scheduled maintenance information or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components 6 If removed install the spare tire lock if equipped into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key Gif equipped and jack handle WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles 800 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km and again at 500 miles 800 km of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc 289 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus
180. ff and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 331 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Use the following guidelines to avoid static build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Refueling Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling you vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Fuel filler cap Your fuel tank fi
181. ff the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control features Audio control features Press MEDIA to select e AM FM1 FM2 e CD Gif equipped e DVD if equipped e SATI SAT2 or SATS Satellite Radio mode if equipped 107 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls In AM FM1 or FM2 mode Press pd SEEK PP to select preset stations within the selected radio band or press and hold to select the next previous radio frequency In Satellite radio mode Cif equipped Press ad SEEK PP to advance through preset channels or subscribed channels In CD mode e Press KE SEEK Pi to select the next selection on the CD or press and hold to forward or reverse the CD In any mode e Press VOL or to adjust volume Climate control features if equipped Press TEMP or to adjust temperature 108 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Press FAN or to adjust fan speed UPFITTER CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Upfitter option package which will provide four switches mounted AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 in the center of the instrument a panel labeled AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 ks and AUX 4 Thes
182. fifth wheel trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts To calculate your maximum trailer weight For pickup trucks Take curb weight hitch hardware and the driver s weight then subtract them from the GCWR listed for your vehicle series engine transmission and drive axle ratio refer to the chart table in the following text This calculation will give you the maximum trailer weight possible for your vehicle For chassis cabs and pickup trucks with aftermarket equipment Weigh your vehicle at a certified scale and subtract this actual curb weight hitch hardware and the driver s weight from the GCWR listed for your vehicle series engine transmission and drive axle ratio refer to the chart table in the following text This calculation will give you the maximum trailer weight possible for your vehicle The weight of all additional cargo and passengers must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight calculated above Further trailer hitch restrictions and limitations exist depending on the type of trailer and hitch used These additional maximum trailer weight and tongue load limitations are listed in the chart table that follows the listing of GCWRs Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully prior to a
183. fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid replacing wiper blades Wrecker towing 367 368
184. for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options or visit the Ford ESP website at www ford esp com GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you write or call FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees canno
185. formation about ordering a tether strap The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion or an anchor bracket mounted to the body shell on the back panel The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor e F Series Regular Cab Ee 4 9 4 e F Series SuperCab j a De amp amp amp G a ae G Ge d 188 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e F Series Crew Cab E Lb Lb L 4 b b L Lk 8 4 Tether strap attachment 1 Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion 2 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat 3 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating positi
186. front of the vehicle beneath the grille Vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine have the plug exposed on the driver side of the vehicle vehicles equipped with a Diesel engine have the plug exposed on the passenger side of the vehicle 234 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by your authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by your authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light B RAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti lock Braking System ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern AB
187. fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding one gallon of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than one gallon may be required e The Check engine indicator cy may come on For more information on the Check engine indicator refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a f
188. fuel level in the fuel tank is at TRIP XXX X or near empty refer to Fuel gauge oom in this chapter mi Door ajar RTT Displays when the ignition is in the RUN position TRIP XXX X iy and any door is open r j ODmi 15 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Transmission Tow Haul Feature TOW automatic transmission HAUL Cif equipped The Tow Haul light remains illuminated as long as the Tow Haul feature is activated Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation If the light remains illuminated and will not cancel using the Tow Haul switch located on the end of the gear shift lever have the system serviced immediately or damage to the transmission could occur Four wheel drive low 4x4 Cif equipped Illuminates when four wheel drive low is engaged LOW Four wheel drive high 4x4 Cif equipped Iluminates when four wheel drive high is engaged HIGH Anti theft Flashes when the A SecuriLock Passive Anti Theft System has been activated R Speed control if equipped Iluminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the a o gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine it has some uniqu
189. g benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the safety belts because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner s Guide NHTSA deactivation criteria excluding Canada 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because e the vehicle has no rear seat e the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 2 Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because e the vehicle has no rear seat e although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of the vehicle or 178 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints the child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condit
190. g BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 301 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and f
191. g from a cold place to a warm one Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and or player If moisture condensation occurs do not insert a CD or DVD into the player If one is already in the player remove it Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD This could take an hour or more 69 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Foreign substances Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind onto the media controls or into the system If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician Cleaning the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any ammonia based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth Rub the screen gently until the dust dirt or fingerprints are removed Do not spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen Cleaning DVD and CD discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing If necessary clean discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge Do not use circu
192. ge it may be utilized as an ambulance Ford urges ambulance manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete Vehicle Manual Ford Truck Body Builder s Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle Modifiers QVM Guidelines as well as pertinent supplements For additional information please contact the Truck Body Builders Advisory Service at 1 877 840 4338 Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance without the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties In addition ambulance usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody temperatures 8 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label is located on the driver s side door pillar or on the rear edge of the driver s door You can determine whether the ambulance manufacturer followed Ford s recommendations by directly contacting that manufacturer Ford Ambulance Preparation Package is only available on certain 6 4L Diesel engine equipped vehicles Using your vehicle as a stationary power source PTO Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take off system Export unique non United States Canada vehic
193. gh the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal t performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 36 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect th
194. glish language LANGUAGE has been selected PRESS RESET 7 FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to ENGLISH change back to English 1 Select this function from the SETUP MENU for the current language to be displayed 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET control to select a new language Selectable languages are English Spanish and French 3 Press the SELECT RESET control switch for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than 4 seconds to return to the INFO MENU System check Press and hold the SELECT RESET control switch to select SYSTEM CHECK when HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK is displayed in the message center Selecting this function from the INFO MENU causes the message center to cycle through each of the systems being monitored For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for two seconds Pressing the SELECT RESET control switch cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows ENGINE HOURS CHARGING SYSTEM AIR FILTER Diesel engine only DOOR AJAR BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL LEVEL TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems Non FW DY Fe In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the di
195. h product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Car Care Kit ZC 26 Motorcraft Car Wash Canada only CXC 21 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant U S only ZC 40 A Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner U S only ZC 11 A Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate ZC 6 A Motorcraft Paint Sealant ZC 45 Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate U S only ZC 17 B Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Triple Clean U S only ZC 13 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner Canada only CXC 94 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 313 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt U
196. h Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion 154 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press front to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion 4 LI i T Press rear to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion 4 Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down Using the manual lumbar support The lumbar support control is located on the outboard side of the 7 seat Turn the lumbar support clockwise h for more support Turn the lumbar support l counterclockwise for less support Heated seats if equipped The heated seat control is located on the climate control panel 155 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To operate the heated seats do the following engine must be running Push gf to activate push again to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated The system will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless the control is pushed to deactivate The system will reset after each ignition key cycle Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped This system allows automatic positio
197. h if the trailer becomes disconnected or remain off if no trailer is connected 4 OUTPUT bar graph When the vehicle s brake pedal is pushed or when the manual control is activated green bar indicators will iluminate to indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual control input 5 Manual control lever Slide the control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for instructions on proper use of this feature If the manual control is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes 224 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Stop Lamps Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except the Center High Mount Stop Lamp presuming proper trailer electrical connection Pressing the vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both trailer and vehicle brake lamps GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing conditions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance whil
198. has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e one or more impact and safing sensors e areadiness light and tone e and the electrical wiring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either flash or stay lit i e The readiness light will not s iluminate immediately after ignition is turned on A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the eve
199. have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 thrown clear times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH 168 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Do not sit on tope of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle the Belt Minder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature Driver only Read Steps 1 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure The Belt Minder feature can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that the following conditions are met e the parking brake is set e the gearshift is in P Park automatic transmission or the neutral position manual transmission e the ignition switch is in the OFF position all vehicle doors are closed the driver s safety belt is unbuckled e the parklamps headlamps are in the OFF position
200. he TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle including ABS in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup Therefore if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may not function at full performance e When the vehicle is turned off the TBC Output is disabled and the display is shut down Reactivation of the ignition from 3 OFF to 4 ON will awaken the TBC module e The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item Ford is not responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or customer installation e Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the Workshop Manual Damage to the unit may result Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Using a step bumper if equipped The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a one inch 25 4 mm shank diameter The bumper has a 5 000 lb 2 270 kg trailer weight and 500 lb 227 kg tongue weight capacity If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position a frame mounted trailer hitch must be installed Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e Do not drive faster than 70 mph 112 km h during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing and don
201. id running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding to avoid undesirable noise and distortion CD MP3 and CD player care e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player Cif equipped e Always store discs out of direct sunlight Excessive heat may damage or warp discs Use care when handling and playing CD R and CD RW discs which are more susceptible to damage from heat light and stress than are regular CDs e Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat with the playing surface facing down in order to prevent damage to the disc or the player e Never insert any object other than a compact disc CD or digital versatile disc DVD into the player as doing so may damage the player and may cause injury to you e Do not disassemble the player The laser used in disc playback is extremely harmful to the eyes The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm 4 75 in audio compact discs and digital versatile discs DVD only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD and DVD players Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached and CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be
202. iesagsactiaaacanssinnteasaerss 332 CAD ACIUY ecesas aenar 352 choosing the right fuel 333 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 0 0 0 0 338 detergent in fuel 334 filling your vehicle with fuel a a o 330 332 335 filter specifications 330 350 fuel pump shut off switch 267 improving fuel economy 335 octane rating 0 ee 334 356 GUAY erresen nS 334 running out of fuel 334 safety information relating to automotive fuels ccee 330 Fuel pump shut off switch 267 FUSES aaneren 268 269 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index G Gas cap see Fuel cap 332 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 0 008 335 GALES cearense 18 transmission fluid temperature gauge eee 22 H Hazard flashers ccccceeeeeeees 267 Head restraints 00 151 Headlamps ssccicvsssesaavdescevstascativacnss 80 AMINE siinses 82 84 autolamp system 0000000 80 daytime running lights 81 flash tO PASS ssrisorisssiraieiasees 81 High beani sccssceseseacaertecssssa ences 81 replacing bulbs 86 88 90 turning on and off 0 80 Heating heating and air conditioning SYSCO ceraian en 71 72 75 Homelink wireless control SPATE 0 Aa A 112 Hood ee A 315 I TOMO erties rriei 231 356 Infant seats see Safety seats oo ees 184 Inspection maintenance I M GOSTING sail a n 340 Instrument
203. if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses Gif worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction When refueling always shut the engine o
204. ifications TRANSFER CASE FLUID IF EQUIPPED 1 Clean the filler plug 2 Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level 3 Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings lubrication will be necessary Refer to the replacement universal joint manufacturer s recommendation for lubrication type and maintenance intervals AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the Motorcraft air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter 348 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine refer to the 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Note Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Loosen clamp and disco
205. igh enough to install the spare tire 8 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 284 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 9 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles If replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles the valve stem must be facing outward If replacing the outboard wheel the valve stem must be facing inward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 10 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Go to step 19 The following steps apply to F 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW and F 450 F 550 vehicles only 11 Slide the notched end of the jack handle over the release valve and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle Make sure the valve is closed by turning it clockwise 12 Position the jack according to the following guides e Front 4x2 F 350 DRW Note Place jack directly under I beam 285 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Front driver side 4x4 F 38350 g DRW isl 9 Note Make sure the jack fits onto re 7 the flat area on the outboard side of the differential housing e Front passenger side 4x4 F 350 DRW
206. igh load or device such as ladder racks or pickup box cover Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off road usage VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE Auxiliary equipment called power take off or PTO is often added to the engine or transmission to operate utility equipment Examples include a wheel lift for tow trucks cranes tools for construction or tire service and pumping fluids PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the powertrain often while the vehicle is stationary In this condition there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving The aftermarket PTO system installer having the most knowledge of the final application is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection or powertrain cooling is required and alerting the user to the safe and proper operation Ford Super Duty Vehicles are qualified for use as a stationary power source within limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book found at www fleet ford com truckbbas and through the Ford Truck Body Builders Advisory Service Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of con
207. ild soap If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product Tanners Preserve Leather Cleaner and a 3M Type T scrubbing pad 311 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning Clean spills as quickly as possible Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather For more specific cleaning information contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1 800 282 KING 5464 Do not spill coffee ketchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the Web site at www krsaddleshop com or telepho
208. ill not engage into 4H 4x4 High or 2H 2WD perform a shift with the transmission in N Neutral or clutch pedal depressed and the vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h 5 If shifting to 2H 2WD with the vehicle at a complete stop disengage the locking hubs optional by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK to FREE Using the N Neutral position The transfer case neutral position overrides the transmission and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever position The vehicle can move forward or backwards This position should only be used when towing the vehicle 2H 4H N 4L Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle Using the Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF 4x4 system if equipped Positions of the electronic shift system Note Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages This is normal 2WD For general on road driving Sends power to the rear wheels only 4x4 HIGH For winter and off road conditions Sends power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement 252 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving 4x4 LOW For low speed off road applications that require extra power such as steep grades deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water Send
209. immer control or e any door is open The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the 1 OFF LOCK position 10 minutes after if the dome lamp is off and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left on KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED You can use the keyless entry keypad to lock or unlock the doors without using a key The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box is marked on the computer module and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create your own 5 digit personal entry code When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to memory seats mirrors and pedals To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 146 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 To associate the entry code with a memory setting enter a sixth digit to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the personal entry code e Pressing 1 e 2 recalls Driver 1 settings e Pressing 3 e 4 recalls Driver 2 se
210. inal as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP coverage It provides the following e Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase such as reimbursement for rentals coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper Warranty expires You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer There are several plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage When you buy Ford ESP you receive Peace of Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada provided by a network of more than 4 600 participating authorized dealers 302 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle you may still be eligible Since this information is subject to change please ask your authorized dealer
211. information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label 197 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving eve
212. ing of the lap and shoulder belts during some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt pretensioners Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Front safety belt height adjustment The front outboard seating positions are equipped with safety belt height adjusters Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder 162 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision To adjust the shoulder belt height push the button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place Center lap and shoulder belt Regular Cab center seating position Super Cab and Crew Cab rear center seating positions Always use both the lap
213. ing with your airbag equipped vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS The SRS is designed to activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbag Such driving also increases the risk of accidents 263 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow removal equipment by its manufacturer Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible airbag deployment Do not attempt to service repair or modify the air bag supplemental restraint system SRS or its fuses See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Please refer to the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment Transmission operation while plowing Operate the vehicle with the automatic transmission gearshift lever in the D
214. inimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling For information on transmission operation after the battery has been disconnected refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Because your vehicle s engine is also electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park automatic transmission or the neutral position manual transmission turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 323 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 6 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of you
215. injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Please refer to the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment Removing the blocker beam without installing snow plow attachment hardware may effect airbag deployment in a crash Do not operate the truck unless either the blocker beam or snow plow attachment hardware is installed on the vehicle Children and airbags For additional important safety information read all information on safety restraints in this guide Children must always be properly restrained Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision An infant in a rear facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag is turned off See Passenger airbag ON OFF switch 173 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it me
216. intervals for changing the spark plugs 350 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used Also available with 6 4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission Part number is FT 176 4Also available with 6 4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission Part number is FT 175 351 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 pa 10 09 moTa4 i rr TV ISEL6NW SSM quejoog oulsug ploy Tosg z9 V 4 i 8A G L 0A UMMM g YeIDI010py syrenb 7 92 Ip G Juelooo oulsuy pml ILOAIOSOI ayelg spa 1040W d V G9D9IN SSM O T Wd uo M 107 LOC VuLewIoj dq dais do sui 04 mi YSTH IJeI010401N A E queolqn y eueq V C61OZIN ISM IXY N oneutudg C9 sd oF1 OSTS OTTS eued 4 ofxe eo TOLA a oe 09S 0Gh d OXL TEY queoqnT E Y Iesy M YJUA TO P squid G g M N O6 MSL HYS YLIIOJON E peouqnT L YOUT 0G V Z6TOZWISM armon name enade Oe Soron H ofxe eo PTOI Wiese yemiorent 098 097 OXL Tey V 861OIN VSa eseern Suneog AVD IT DX Oo A pue oxy JuoIg suleeq fputds V 06961 Z L80 PXP eMjerodurel UstH queowqn y ai 06 MOS AX 06 408
217. ion Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is displayed Press A IV 4 SEEK gt to adjust the hours minutes AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use W lt SEEK SEEK to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt SEEK to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release lt q SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search 31 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle be
218. ion control light will TRIP XXXX X illuminate and the engine will not BO808C 8 mi rev up when you push further on the accelerator This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern Also if traction control is on when the vehicle is put into four wheel drive mode if equipped the traction control system will be automatically disabled Traction control operation will resume when the vehicle is placed back into two wheel drive mode Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a Traction Control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN 237 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving The Traction Control switch located on the instrument panel to the left of the climate control system has an indicator light that illuminates when the system is off The Traction Control system will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned off and on The Traction Control system should normally be left on If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface try switching the Traction Control system off Thi
219. ion required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 42 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required not available NO TEXT NO TEXT NO SIGNAL Category information not available Loss of signal from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to the vehicle antenna Update of channel programming in progress UPDATING CALL SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Satellite service has been deactivated by SIRIUS Satellite Radio NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Song title information Song title information not available at this time on this channel The sy
220. ion which according to his or her physician e causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe the crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria Transport Canada deactivation criteria Canada Only 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because e my vehicle has no rear seat e the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which acco
221. ions A Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips f To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in the back seat where they can be properly restrained A Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided 158 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3
222. is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a failure in the RSS The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS 247 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD OPERATION IF EQUIPPED For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter When four wheel drive 4WD is engaged power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case 4WD can be selected when additional traction is desired 4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement Doing so could result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case increased tire wear and decreased fuel economy Manual Shift On Stop MSOS 4x4 system if equipped The 4WD system is engaged or disengaged by rotating the control for both front wheel hub locks from the FREE or LOCK position then manually engaging or disengaging the transfer
223. ive of your vehicle a identification number 357 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 1 World manufacturer identifier XX X XXX XX X X XXXXXX 2 Brake type and gross vehicle weight rating GVWR d 3 Vehicle line series body type T 5 b b 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO IN U S A DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXL XXXXKG H XXXXKG XXXX XXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXX XXXX XX XXXX XX RI AT XXX kPa XX PSICOLD AT XXX kPa XX P THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MO VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK TINTTR PPS R TAXLE TR SPR XXXXX XX X XX XXX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXX UTC AAV 2USA 1520472 AA You can find a transmission transaxle code on the vehicle Safety Compliance Certification Label The following table tells you which transmission or transaxle each code represents Six speed manual Dana ZF 56 650 Six speed manual Dana ZF M6HD W Five speed automatic TorgShift gas engines B Five speed automatic TorqShift diesel engine 358 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus
224. k of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement see an authorized dealer 202 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are repla
225. ke and shift to P Park 314 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Block the wheels e Manual transmission 1 Set the parking brake depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N Neutral 2 Block the wheels Note Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running OPENING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch located below the passenger side of the grille next to the headlamp Slide the handle to release the auxiliary latch 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 315 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT Refer to the 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations 5 4L V8 gasoline engines 1 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2 Battery 3 Transmission fluid dipstick automatic transmission 4 Engine oil filler cap 5 Engine oil dipstick 6 Power steering fluid r
226. l the vehicle has been aired out For maximum cooling performance MAX A C in MAX A C mode e Move the temperature control to the coolest setting e Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust in order to maintain comfort To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold weather 1 Select 7 2 Select A C 3 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop 74 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DATC SYSTEMS IF EQUIPPED e DATC ot Oe 75 Climate Controls e DATC with heated seats and heated mirrors ew eens oe DUAL PIRIL Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Units English Metric under either Standard Message Center or Optional Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter In order to achieve maximum cooling performance press 7s A C SER and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C and the highest blower setting 1 Q Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster and demister vents Can be used to c
227. lar motion Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the FES will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system without interface to the radio While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A and B will be connected to FES DISC 70 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls HEATER ONLY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 2 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control ps Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents lt A Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents O OFF Outside air is shut out
228. le specific information For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the ones that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert A N Fasten Safety Belt A T Airbag Side fe Child Seat Tether ay il Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System gi EL Master Lighting Switch 6 Ts Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Vas Windshield GY Defrost Demist 10 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window D
229. leaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the fuel recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse affect on powertrain components 334 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If you have run out of
230. leaning racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint and sprays to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and
231. lear thin ice or fog from the windshield To exit G 7 select another mode 2 Passenger temperature control Press to increase decrease the passenger side temperature in the vehicle cabin 3A Dual Single dual electric temperature control Allows the driver to have full control of the cabin temperature settings single zone or allows the passenger to have control of their individual temperature settings dual zone control Press to turn on dual zone mode press again to return to single zone 3B Qi Heated mirrors Press to defrost the outside rear view mirrors The heated mirrors will turn off after 10 minutes or can be turned off by pressing the button again Refer to Power mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter for more information 76 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls 4 C amp gt Recirculation control Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except CR defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 5 A C control Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO Y defrost
232. ler hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 246 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position If the tailgate is down the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or continuously The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on An RSS control allows the driver to Raa turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition must be on OFF and the gear selector in R Reverse An indicator light on the control will iluminate when the system
233. ler to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all seat belts should be checked for proper function 161 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in the Workshop Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature e This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The front outboard seat belt systems have a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt retractor pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate only during certain frontal or near frontal collisions with sufficient longitudinal deceleration A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens the webb
234. let can cause damage not covered by your warranty 96 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls POWER POINT OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel On SuperCab and Crew Cab models another power point is located on the rear of the center console if equipped Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W To prevent the battery from being discharged do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used Cigar lighter if equipped Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating this will damage the lighter element and socket The lighter will be released from its heating position when it is ready to be used Note If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to the Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter information on checking and replacing fuses Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty 97 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls POWER WINDOWS AN Do not
235. lite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 14 AM FM Press AM FM to select Do AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press VOL PUSH to turn ON OFF Turn VOL PUSH to increase decrease volume VOL PUSH Note If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a CD MP3 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last 17 amp CD eject Press to eject a CD MP3 18 CD slot Insert a CD MP3 label side up in the CD slot 29 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Premium Audiophile in dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped omi FF MUTE M or ak AM A O A FM ux 14 VOL PUSH TEXT seek JEX seep REW FF FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE P Il 43 1 2 Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which allows you to operate the window switches and audio for up to ten minut
236. lity vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear safety belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS AWD and AWD Systems if equipped A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD when you select the 4WD mode has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot 192 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary Information on shif
237. ller cap has an indexed design with a 1 4 turn on off feature When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it stops 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks If the Check Fuel Cap indicator comes on and stays on after you start the engine the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed Turn off the engine remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it 332 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The vehicle warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in possible personal injury FORD RECOMMENDS BP bp Choosi
238. ly e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy e You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy e Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy e Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance e Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size e Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy e Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in your vehicle s scheduled maintenance information Conditions e Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars
239. m 1 to 15 and wraps back to 1 6 To exit the zone setting mode and to lock in your change e press and release the SETUP control or e press INFO control to exit or e wait 4 seconds and the zone will be locked in Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 127 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 7 Press the RESET control to start the compass calibration function RESET FOR CALIBRATION 8 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h CIRCLE SLOWLY until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO TO CALIBRATE CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED It will take up to five circles to complete calibration 9 The compass is now calibrated Note If the RESET control is CALIBRATION pressed or 3 minutes has expired COMPLETED the display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the compass heading until the compass is calibrated Language 1 Select this function from the SETUP menu for the current LANGUAGE language to be displayed ENGLISH 3 2 Waiting 4 seconds or pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of the language choices Selectable languages are English Spanish or French
240. made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt Automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt 160 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed except a booster in a front or rear outboard passenger seating position Gf equipped Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode After any vehicle collision the front passenger and rear outboard seat belt systems must be checked by your authorized dea
241. may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies or procedures please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 FORD Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps described above contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you In the United States Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 www customersaskford com 298 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor C
242. misting in cold weather 1 Select F 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 79 Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL O Turns the lamps off PS Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the headlamps on Autolamp control if equipped The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for approximately 20 seconds or on vehicles equipped with a message center you can select a delay from 0 180 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to OFF e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise e To turn autolamps off rotate the control clockwise to OFF Foglamp conirol if equipped The headlamp control also operates B R the foglamps The foglamps can be turned on when the headlamp control is in the P A or gD positions and the high beams are not turned on
243. mpass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy 126 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Compass zone calibration adjustment 1 Determine your magnetic zone by referring to the zone map 2 Turn ignition to the RUN position 3 Start the engine 4 From the SETUP menu press and release the RESET control until ZONE lt XX gt the message center display changes a to show the current zone setting RESET CHANGE XX 5 Press and release the RESET control repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center The range of zone values are fro
244. mperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 343 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches
245. mps may be aimed in the vertical up down and the horizontal left right directions using the procedures following The aerodynamic headlamps can only be aimed in the vertical direction up down using the following procedures The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant and should not normally need adjusting Vertical and horizontal aim adjustment sealed beam headlamps The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using mechanical aimers If mechanical aimers are used and the cross car sight line is in any way blocked set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the same setting such that the cross car sight line is no longer blocked per the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used You can also aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below To adjust the headlamps 1 Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet 7 6 meters away from a vertical plain surface 8 Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters 82 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights e 4 Horizontal reference line e 5 Center of headlamps e 6 Center line of the vehicle 2 The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens a circle or cross marker or on the bulb shield internal to the lamp
246. multaneously pressing button 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 controls on the remote entry keypad if equipped or using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter Gf equipped Autolock feature if equipped The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed 136 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security e the ignition is in the 3 ON position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than 2 seconds The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 ON position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than 2 seconds Deactivating activating autolock feature There are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock procedure e using a keypad procedure if equipped or e or by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Optional message center in the Driver controls chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position and all vehicle doors are closed You
247. n ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without disengaging the front hubs may cause damage to the automatic transmission 296 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Towing an a 4x2 or an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground for more than 50 miles 80 km and or in excess of 35 mph 56 km h may cause damage to the automatic transmission Note On Dual Rear Wheel DRW vehicles an outer rear wheel must be removed prior to using a wheel lift wrecker If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle 297 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED At home You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty repairs While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you
248. n a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot G e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bars For Dissimilar spare tires and Full size matching spare tires see the Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information and Full size Matching Spare Tire Wheel Information sections for descriptions Store
249. nates 6 If the 4x4 LOW indicator light does not illuminate within 15 seconds allow the vehicle to move at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h then repeat steps 2 through 5 while the vehicle is rolling before reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer Shifting from 4x4 LOW to 4x4 HIGH or 2WD 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop l y SS 2 Depress the brake 3 Place the gearshift in N Neutral 4 Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4 HIGH or 2WD position 5 Hold the shift conditions until the 4x4 LOW indicator light shuts off 6 If the 4x4 LOW indicator light does not shut off within 15 seconds allow the vehicle to move at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h then repeat steps 2 through 5 while the vehicle is rolling before reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer I l 4X4 R o eZ A Driving off road with truck and utility vehicles 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the road How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger
250. nce you NORMAL have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is Angle 1 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Aspect ratio Select ASPECT RATIO to select the viewing size and shape of the video displayed on the LCD screen This is disc dependent COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK You can select from WIDE LETTER BOX or PAN SCAN Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The LCD screen display will immediately change to your selection after the system resumes playback of the DVD The system default is WIDE 16 9 This is disc dependent Language Select LANGUAGE to select the language you would like to use for audio output English Spanish French This is disc dependent ASPET RIO LAN AGE SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is English 60 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Subtitles Select SUBTITLES to turn the subtitle option on or off The system default is OFF Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm This is disc dependent Audio CDs To play audio CDs on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the DVD system is ON 3 Insert an audio CD into the DVD sy
251. nd after any towing operation Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for the transmission fluid temperature information 219 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Do not exceed the GCWR listed for your vehicle on the following chart table or the GVWR GAWR or tire ratings specified on the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended trailer weight which exceeds the limit of the vehicle s GCWR GVWR GAWR or tire ratings could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Rear axle Manual Automatic F 250 Pick up F 350 Single Rear Wheel SRW Pick up F 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW Pick up 6 8L F 350 Single Rear Wheel SRW Chassis Cab 220 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Maximum GCWR lb kg Rear axle Manual Automatic ratio transmission transmission F 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW Chassis Cab 15000 6804 16500 7484 17500 7938 18500 8391 6 8L 20500 9299 21500 9752 22500 10206 23000 10433 F 450 Chassis Cab F 550 4 88 5 38 26000 11793 26000 11793 Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle See your authorized dealer
252. nd cluster lens with a clean and damp white cotton cloth then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth you may also use Motorcraft Dash amp Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A on the instrument panel and interior trim areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces 309 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 to the wiped area and spread around evenly 3 Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to
253. ne By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the C indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 339 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specification
254. ne in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464 If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking delivery of your vehicle Condition twice yearly in order to replenish lost oils and revitalize the aroma suppleness and resilience of the leather e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt Note Use care when using a power washer to clean the driveline especially the driveshaft and interfacing components The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage 312 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning FORD LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Eac
255. ners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 Power control Press to turn the FES Family Entertainment System ON OFF 2 Cursor controls Use in various active menus to advance the cursor up down left right When not in a Menu the left and right cursor controls decrease and increase the display brightness 3 DISPLAY Press to access the on screen display of the FES functions and adjustments 4 RETURN Press to return to the previous menu screen 5 ANGLE DVD dependent Press to select the angle to view the scene 6 Channel A B Press to select either A or B headphones and then use the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the headphones 7 VOL Volume When in Single Play press to increase or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones 51 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 8 Fast Forward Next In DVD mode press and hold for a quick advance within the DVD Press and release to advance to the next chapter In CD MP3 mode press to access the next track 9 Play Pause Press to play or pause a DVD 10 SHUFFLE Press to play all tracks on the current CD MP3 disc in random order 11 STOP Press to stop the current DVD or CD
256. ng 164 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints longer The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash so always wear the shoulder belt properly and don t allow any slack in either the lap or shoulder portions Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into the buckle you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it 1 To lengthen the lap belt pull some webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor 2 While holding the webbing below the tongue grasp the tip metal portion of the tongue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue upward 3 Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the buckle How to fasten the cinch tongue Regular Cab center seating positions and Super Cab Crew Cab rear center seating positions 1 Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and chest 2 Be sure the belt is not twisted If the belt is twisted remove the twist 3 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch 4 Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist While you are fastened in the safety
257. ng system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly Powertrain malfunction Reduced power Electronic throttle T YYY Y control RTT Displays when the TRIP a 2 engine has defaulted to a limp home operation or when a transmission problem has been detected and shifting may be restricted If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer 14 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Traction control RTT Cif equipped Displays when the Traction Control system is active Instrument Cluster If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately by TRIP XXX X 0 0 mi your authorized dealer Refer to Traction control in the Driving chapter for more information Check fuel cap RTT Displays when the fuel cap may not be T yyy Vv properly installed Continued driving TRIP AA n Re with this light on may cause the mi Service engine soon warning light to come on Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Engine coolant temperature RTT Displays when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and TRIP XXX X 0 0 Mi let it cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Low fuel RTT Displays when the
258. ng the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that are blended with a maximum of 85 ethanol The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Do not use fuel containing methanol It can damage critical fuel system components Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Studies indicate that these additives can cause your vehicle s emission control system to deteriorate more rapidly Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty 333 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as Regular that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems try a different brand of un
259. nimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as described below e First at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway e Next at least 20 minutes driving in stop and go city type traffic with at least four idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the service interval schedules If adding fluid is necessary use only MERCON ATF 340 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Gasoline engine shown diesel engine similar Refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in the 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner Guide Supplement Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature 20 F 80 F 7 C 25 C 1 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX range Do not add fluid if the level is within this range 2 If the fluid level is low Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between the MIN and MAX range 3 Start the engine 4 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right s
260. ning of the driver seat power mirrors and adjustable pedals to two programmable positions 4 The memory seat control is located on the driver door e To program position 1 move the 1 2 driver seat mirrors and pedals if equipped to the desired position using the associated controls Press the SET control The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate While the light is illuminated press control 1 e To program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using control 2 A position can be recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not in the RUN position e only in P Park or N Neutral if the ignition is in the RUN position A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter UNLOCK control if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for more information on how to use the keypad refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter 156 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints REAR FOLDING SEAT SYSTEM WITH LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED The rear seatback has a split 60 40 seat Each seat cushion can be flipped up into the seatback position Note The Crew Cab rear 60 40 split ben
261. nnect sensor 2 Release three retainer clamps 3 Pull air filter cover toward passenger side of vehicle and up to release the tabs Lift air filter element up and out of housing The air filter box needs to be free of any debris before installing a new air filter 4 Install a new air filter element into the tray assembly 349 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Return air filter cover to original position making sure the four tabs are engaged and secure the three clamps Tighten clamp on air tube and reconnect sensor MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS PO sage Spark pusen J 1The PCV valve is a critical emission component It is one of the items listed in the scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system For PCV valve replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as a Motorcraft or equivalent replacement part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not used For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
262. not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat 243 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION IF EQUIPPED R130 HH L2 4 Using the clutch The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed To start the vehicle 1 Make sure the parking brake is fully set 2 Press the clutch pedal to the floor then put the gearshift lever in the neutral position 3 Start the engine 4 Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired gear 1 First or R Reverse 5 Release the parking brake then slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator During each shift the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased shift efforts prematurely wear transmission components or damage the transmission Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn t interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill These actions will reduce the life of the clutch Recommended shift speeds Do not overspeed the engine when going downhill or steep grades If equip
263. ns and property 199 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading A Stay out of the trajectory 1 as indicated in the illustration TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 200 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the ti
264. nsmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 4 Firmly press hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 5 through 7 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 5 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 6 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 113 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 7 7 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequ
265. nt of a collision Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles See your local authorized dealer Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel 175 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Passenger airbag ON OFF switch if equipped An airbag ON OFF switch has been installed in this vehicle Before driving always OFF look at the face of the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these ON instructions and warnings Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of PASSENGER AIRBAG serious injury or death in a collision Turning the passenger airbag off 1 Insert the ignition key turn the switch to OFF position and hold in OFF position while removing the OFF key b A 2 When the ignition is turned to the ON position the OFF light on illuminates briefly momentarily shuts off and then turns back on This indicates that the passenger airbag is deactivated PASSENGER AIRBAG AN If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON have the passenger air bag switch serviced at your authorized dealer immediately In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch always remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON OFF switch 176 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt
266. ntil the mirrors reach their desired position 102 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Memory mirrors if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the outside rearview mirrors For more information on this feature refer to Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Mirror mounted side turn signal indicator if equipped When the vehicle turn signals are activated the outer portion of the mirror housing will blink amber The turn signal feature can be seen by other drivers who may approach from the rear of the vehicle Clearance lamps if equipped Illuminates when the headlamps or parking lamps are switched on This provides additional visibility of your vehicle to other drivers on the road 103 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position A Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal toward you or away from you The adjustment allows for approximately 2 75 inches 70 mm of maximum travel Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved
267. nts to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe the crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U S and Canada If small children generally children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 Ib 18 kg or less ride in your vehicle you must put them in safety seats made especially for children Many states require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight years old Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle When possible always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi
268. oe 36 Auxiliary power point 96 Axle refill capacities 0 352 traction LOK s 2eccvcc avieieee 239 B Battery mrien Ra 322 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index acid treating emergencies 322 jumping a disabled battery 290 maintenance free 0 00 322 replacement specifications 350 SEPVICINE sss csdivaieissbesnteeseausaazcase 322 Belt Minder ccccccceseeees 167 Brakes o sess sie eassanerctavissepeeecouecne 235 Naan E o E E 235 anti lock brake system ABS warning light seeeseeeeeeeeeseees 235 fluid checking and adding 342 fluid refill capacities 352 PATKE sires aa 236 shift interlock sssoorseiares 240 trailer 5 cdhecscevnasscipeseedeaassacveasennss 223 Break in period cccccecceeeeeees 5 BUDS serrare n A 85 C Capacities for refilling fluids 352 Cassette tape player 22 Cell phone use ccccccessseeeeseeees 7 Child safety restraints 181 child safety belts 0 0 0 0 181 Child safety seats 000 184 attaching with tether straps 188 in front seat wo eee eeeeeees 185 IM rear SEAL csecsshiefocssnccteussdeceaate 185 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 307 instrument panel 00 309 INGETIOL 3 is xeidsessesseaeteaneeteasiavtacd 310 Plastic PALES sveicsissacssedeseassaaiends 309 Safety belts 0 0 ccccceeeeseeeees 310 WaS M
269. of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows 1 ENGINE HOURS 2 CHARGING SYSTEM 125 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 3 AIR FILTER Diesel engine only 4 DOOR AJAR 5 BRAKE SYSTEM 6 FUEL LEVEL Units English Metric 1 Select this function from the SETUP menu for the current units UNITS to be displayed lt ENG gt METRIC 2 Press the RESET control to change from English to Metric Autolamp timer presets This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off 1 To disable enable the autolamp delay feature select this function SBUTGLARP GELAY from the SETUP control for the 1 current display mode lt 0 gt 10 20 2 Press the RESET control to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds Autolocks This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion 1 To disable enable the autolock a feature select this function from the AUTO LOCKS SETUP control for the current lt QN gt OFF display mode 2 Press the RESET control to turn the autolocks ON or OFF Compass display if equipped The compass heading is displayed as one of N NE E SE S SW W and NW in the message center display The co
270. off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as driving at slower speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 239 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Brake shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the 3 ON position and the brake pedal is not depressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of the P Park position with the ignition in the 3 ON position and the brake pedal depressed 1 Apply the parking brake Turn the ignition key to 1 OFF LOCK then remove the key Locate the access cover plate for the brake shift interlock override It is located on top of the steering column shroud 2 Apply the brake Use a tool or a small screwdriver to pry
271. ompany of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 1 800 565 3673 FORD www ford ca If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps described above contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you In the United States Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 1 800 521 4140 TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 www customersaskford com In Canada Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 1 800 387 9333 www lincolncanada com In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle please have the following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized dealer is located e The year and make of your vehicle e The date of vehicle purchase e The current odometer reading e The vehicle identification number VIN Additional Assistance If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute you may wish to contact the Better Business Bureau BBB AUTO LINE program U S only 299 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance In some states in the U S you mus
272. on 4 You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether anchors Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before installing the child seat Refer to the Rear folding seat system with load floor section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats 5 Remove tether cover 6 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown e Front seats Regular Cab 189 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Front seat SuperCab e Rear seats Crew Cab If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 7 Refer to the Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat 8 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases Tether strap attachment rear SuperCab only There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat along the bottom edge of the rear window in the SuperCab These loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to three child safety seat tether straps These straps may be secured below the back of the seat with rubber bands To access reach below the b
273. ool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation engages automatically with selection of MAX A C or can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 5 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in MAX A C G7 and YH 6 Gy Heated mirrors Press to turn the heated mirrors on and off The heated mirrors turn off automatically after 10 minutes 7 4 Heated seats Press to turn the heated seats on and off The heated seats automatically shut off after 10 minutes The heated seats turn off when the ignition is turned off 73 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the G7 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in the O OFF position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or unti
274. or enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate after entering a valid keypad entry code To unlock all doors press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time You do not need to enter the keypad code first Note The interior lamps will turn off SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent the
275. or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance Hitches ON PICK UP TRUCKS the trailer hitch provided on this vehicle enhances collision protection for the fuel system DO NOT REMOVE Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle s bumper or attach to the axle You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 for conventional towing or 15 25 fifth wheel towing of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Integrated hitch rating The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of operation e Weight carrying requires a draw bar and hitch ball The draw bar supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer e Weight distributing requires an aftermarket weight distributing system which includes draw bar hitch ball spring bars and snap up brackets The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between the truck and the trailer by this system 221 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Maximum z F Maximum Hitch Type Heia Trailer Tongue Weight Weight Ib ae kg 6 8L DRW Weight carrying 8000 3629 800 863 Pickup aaa Weight 15000 6804 1500 680 requires 2 5 distributing drawbar 6 8L DRW Weight carrying 6000 2721 600 272 Pickup ee a Weight 12500 5670 1250 567 adapter S distributing requires 2 drawbar All SRW Pickups Weight carrying 6000 2721 600 272 and 5
276. or higher Airbag secondary warning chime Sounds to inform the driver in the event that the airbag readiness warning lamp is inoperable that there is a fault in the supplemental restraint system 17 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed SELECT RESET Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and XS C If it enters the red section O the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 18 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Standard message center or Optional message center in the OD mi Driver Controls chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys TRIP XXXX If equipped with a one button 0 0 mi message center Select Reset press and release the SELECT RESET button on the cluster to toggle between odometer and trip odometer display To reset press and hold for less than 2 seconds If equipped
277. ormation 121 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED With the ignition in the RUN position the message center located on your instrument cluster displays important vehicle information through a constant monitor of vehicle systems You may select display features on the message center for a display of status The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by an indicator chime Selectable features Reset Press this control to select and reset functions shown in the INFO menu and SETUP menu 122 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus APRND3217 Driver Controls Info menu This control displays the following control displays e Trip Odometer A or B e Distance to Empty RESET e Average Fuel Economy e Drive Time Elapsed Travel Timer SETUP e Blank Odometer and compass if equipped off Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Distance to empty DTE Selecting this function from the INFO menu estimates approximately VYY f T how far you can drive with the fuel XXX MILES TOE remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display LO
278. out the access cover Insert the tool into the access hole and slide the white override button towards the left Move the gear shift lever into N Neutral while holding the white override disc towards the left When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P Park position without the brake pedal depressed To avoid unwanted vehicle movement always set the parking brake 3 Start the vehicle If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working 240 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer as soon as possible Understanding the shift positions of the 5 speed automatic transmission PRND321 This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shif
279. ow can be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book Snowplow section found at www fleet ford com truckbbas A typical installation affects the following e Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection and airbag deployment braking and lighting Look for an Alterer s Label on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity TARC is shown on the lower right side of the vehicle s Safety Compliance Certification Label This applies to Ford completed vehicles of 10 000 Ib 4 536 kg GVWR or less This is the weight of permanently attached auxiliary equipment such as snowplow frame mounting hardware that can be added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS Exceeding this weight may require the auxiliary equipment installer additional safety certification responsibility The Front Accessory Reserve Capacity FARC is added for customer convenience 262 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent exceeding the FGAWR and provide front to rear weight balance for proper braking and steering e Front wheel toe may require re adjustment to prevent premature uneven tire wear Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop Manual e Headlight aim
280. ped use the tachometer and do not allow engine speed to exceed the redline area Operating the engine beyond the recommended speeds can cause severe engine damage 244 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Shift according to the following shift speed charts recommended for best fuel economy Shift from 30 mph 48 km h 40 mph 64 km h 15 mph 24 km h Maximum downshift speeds 6 speed transmission Shift from Transfer case position if equipped 2H or 4H 4L Overdrive 4 45 mph 72 km h 6 mph 26 km h 4 3 35 mph 56 km h 2 mph 19 km h 20 mph 82 km h 8 mph 13 km h 2 1 5 mph 8 km h 2 mph 8 km h 1 LO Only shift to LO when at a stop 1 Use 2H or 4H for 4WD equipped vehicles 2 Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces Reverse 1 Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R Reverse Failure to do so may damage the transmission 2 Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least three seconds before shifting into R Reverse e The gearshift lever can only be moved into R Reverse by moving it from left of 3 Third and 4 Fourth before shifting into R Reverse This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally being shifted into R Reverse from Overdrive Parking your vehicle 1 Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position 2 Fully apply the
281. pen an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company 304 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http hvww safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 305 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean
282. perate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility 329 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible FUEL FILTER For fuel filter replacement see you
283. perating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system OFF or with recirculated air ane engaged and A C off e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e For maximum cooling performance MAX A C Automatic operation e Press AUTO for full automatic operation e Do not override A C or C amp A recirculated air e Set the temperature to 60 F 16 C Override operation e Select air distribution e Select A C and C amp gt recirculated air Use gE recirculated air with A C to provide colder airflow e Set the temperature to 60 F 16 C e Set highest fan speed initially then adjust to maintain comfort In panel or 4 panel floor modes e Move temperature control to full cold e Select A C and C23 recirculated air Use recirculated air with A C to provide colder airflow e Set highest fan speed initially then adjust to maintain comfort 78 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls e To aid in side window defogging de
284. port assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters Gf equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and your authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted A Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS 171 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag s
285. posing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in this section If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine refer to the Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section of your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section 327 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristi
286. post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security transmitter to each memory position using this procedure The first transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 1 settings and the second transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 2 settings How to program your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote keyless entry keypads and remote entry transmitters maximum of four available before beginning this procedure Note Do not press the brake pedal anytime during this sequencing as doing so will invalidate the procedure To reprogram the remote entry transmitters 1 Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked 2 Put the key in the ignition 3 Cycle eight times rapidly within 10 seconds between the 1 OFF LOCK position and 3 ON Note The eighth turn must end in the 3 ON position The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been activated 4 Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter Note If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed 5 Repeat Step 4 to program each additional remote entry transmitter 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters Note After 20 seconds you will automatically exit the programming mode Th
287. pplement Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission 1 Make sure the parking brake is set 2 Make sure the gearshift is in P Park 232 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If starting a vehicle with a manual SS I IY transmission 2 1 Make sure the parking brake is set 2 Push the clutch pedal to the floor L yt N e Turn the key to 3 ON without turning the key to 4 START Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 ON without turning the key to 4 START If there is difficulty in turning the key rotate the steering wheel until the key turns freely This condition may occur when e the front wheels are turned e a front wheel is against the curb 2 Turn the key to 4 START then release the key as soon as the engine starts Excessive cranking could damage the starter 233 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Note If the engine does not start within five second
288. prove the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably Booster seats also may make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably but make sure that the belt is approximately centered on the shoulder When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and 181 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they weigh about 80 Ib 86 kg about 8 to 12 years old Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat without slouching Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Types of booster seats There are two types of belt positioning booster seats Those that are backless If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield and use the lap shoulde
289. r belt If a seating position has a low seat back and no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head top of ear level above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back and lap shoulder belts 182 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Those with a high back If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with lap shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb 18 kg Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder VO If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this re
290. r authorized dealer Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in possible personal injury Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled A Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 330 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
291. r imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com Safety information Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Family Entertainment System FES See your dealer Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment 67 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves The front glass on the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen may break when hit with a hard surface If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the roa
292. r performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS IF EQUIPPED To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to Z RT adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place The spotter mirror below the main glass if equipped must be adjusted manually Heated outside mirrors E if equipped The main mirror glass is heated to remove ice mist and fog To activate the heated mirrors press the heated mirror control located on the climate control panel The heated mirrors will operate for 10 minutes then automatically shut off or shut off when the engine is turned off In cases of extreme ice and cold the heater control may need pressing again after 10 minutes in order to fully clear the glass The spotter mirror below the main glass is not heated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to re adjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Fold away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully before driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash 100 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls
293. r to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca 266 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus HAZARD FLASHER The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Push in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Roadside Emergencies Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt After an accident if the engine cranks but does not start this switch may have been activated This switch is located on the passenger s side of the instrument panel Open the front passenger door and remove the small access panel 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus QY A 267 Roadside Emergencies The switch has a red button on top O A To reset the switch 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no leaks are apparent reset the switch by pushing in on the
294. r vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive 2 batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized YY standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the mileage kilometer intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester 014 R1060 The level of coolant should be maintained at the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C
295. ransmission fluid temperature gauge automatic transmission only If the gauge is in the Normal area normal the transmission fluid is within the J normal operating temperature between H and C 633 H Yellow area warning the transmission fluid is higher than P4 normal operating temperature This can be caused by special operation O conditions i e snowplowing towing H or off road use Refer to Special Operating Conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for instructions Operating the transmission for extended periods of time with the gauge in the yellow area may cause internal transmission damage 20 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower the transmission temperature into the normal range Red area over temperature the transmission fluid is overheating x Stop the vehicle to allow the i temperature to return to normal H range If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area stop the vehicle and verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow through the grill If the gauge continues to show high temperatures see your authorized dealer 21 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS AM FM stereo system if equipped VOL PUSH oO ON
296. rcraft products call 1 800 959 3673 FORD Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury During normal operation the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should remain constant or rise slightly If the fluid level drops refill the fluid level to the step in the reservoir 1 Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt and water from entering the reservoir 2 Remove cap and rubber diaphragm from reservoir 3 Add fluid until the level reaches the step in the reservoir 4 Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap onto reservoir TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid if equipped Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating te
297. rding to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant s condition 2 Child age 12 or under A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because e my vehicle has no rear seat e although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient or 179 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints the child has a medical condition that according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child s condition 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condition that according to his or her physician e poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accide
298. re when the tread is worn gair down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm aa y When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after 6 years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after 6 years due to aging even if it has not been used 201 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristic
299. replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board MES HONOL LO AYALLVE FOV Id STVNIWHS ATVH Y3HLO Ni 3 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming Note If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals feature you can associate a remote entry 143 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide
300. res Wheels and Loading chapter for more information CHECK AIR FILTER Diesel engine only Refer to Instrument Cluster in your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR Diesel engine only Displayed when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs to be drained Refer to your 6 0 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for more information 130 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls TAILGATE LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a tailgate lock designed to help prevent theft of the tailgate e Insert ignition key and turn to the right to engage lock e Turn ignition key to the left to unlock Tailgate removal Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading 1 Lower the tailgate 2 Use a screwdriver to pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw Disconnect cable 3 Disconnect the other cable 4 Lift tailgate to a 45 angle 5 Lift right side off of its hinge 6 Lift tailgate back up to within 10 of its closed position while keeping the right hand side
301. rized dealer 4WD Systems 4WD when you select a 4WD mode uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case On 4WD vehicles the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter Information on transfer case maintenance 257 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle Normal characteristics On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from anoth
302. rking brake is fully released Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park automatic transmission or in 1 First manual transmission Note If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the engine may be required to run while power accessories operate and the parking brake is set It is recommended that wheel chocks be used during this operation 236 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If youre parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer press and hold the brake pedal down then set the parking brake There may be a little vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle s weight This is normal and should be no reason for concern If needed press and hold the service brake pedal down then try reapplying the parking brake Chock the wheels if required If the parking brake cannot hold the weight of the vehicle the parking brake may need to be serviced or the vehicle may be overloaded TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control system This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice covered roads and gravel roads The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions During Traction Control operation the tract
303. rom the various possible en playing media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD DVD AUX The media will show in the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode When in Single Play mode the media source will be displayed on the radio Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and DVD AUX sources 13 RETURN Press to return to the playing media or to resume Lee playback 14 MENU When playing a DVD ww press MENU once to enter the DVD disc menu if available and press twice to enter the system set up menu From the set up menu you may select from Angle Aspect Ratio Language Subtitles Disc resume Compression Restore Defaults and Back For more detailed information refer to Menu mode 15 ENTER Press to select confirm the current selection 16 Cursor Brightness controls Use the cursor controls to make E ig various selections when in any menu When not in a menu and in DVD mode press lt lt i gt to adjust the brightness A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness levels Remote control Unless otherwise stated all operations can be carried out with the remote control Always point the remote control directly at the player Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player 50 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Ow
304. rs will swipe three times with washer fluid e along push and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds gt Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers 94 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED 1 Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you 2 Move the steering up or down until you find the desired location 3 Release the steering wheel release control This will lock the steering wheel in position A Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving TRANSMISSION CONTROL Tow Haul feature 5 speed automatic transmission if equipped To activate press the transmission control switch TCS located on the gt gearshift The TOW HAUL indicator ea lt light will illuminate in the comes instrument cluster The transmission will operate in all gears Press the transmission control switch again to deactivate Tow Haul mode When
305. rst 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 300 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in achieving satisfaction by following the three step procedure outlined on the front page of the Warranty Guide However if your warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration Initially the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern through mediation Mediation is a process
306. rtain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Australia www ford com au e In Mexico www ford com mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Ro
307. rtainment Systems Battery replacement l v Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit Since all batteries have a limited shelf life replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with the unit 53 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Headphones Wireless headphones Your FES system is equipped with two sets of battery powered infrared wireless headphones Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the headphones Batteries are included Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with the system Also wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system Refer to Wired Headphones below 54 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To install the batteries remove the screw at the bottom of the cover Then lightly press down on top and slide the cover off When replacing the batteries use two new batteries alkaline recommended and install them with the correct orientation as indicated in the battery housing 55 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To operate the headphones e Pre
308. ry before servicing high current fuses Always replace the cover to the passenger compartment fuse panel before reconnecting the battery If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 270 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Sa a gt af lal 3 S oj foo fry es fo N o NI vi 0 i i ini f iol oy oj N es 19 o D 7 aa Cio C13 Ci6_ iS e Joo foo foo a o Be SE a 5 C27 28 Q The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel 1 4 30A _ Notused spar O 0 Keypad illumination Brake Shift Interlock BSI 7 8 0A Right headlamp Low beam 9 5A__ Interior lighting 271 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location mage Description Power mirror switch Driver power seat Memory Park lamp relay feed p23 1A hish beam headlight relay feed 24 20A Horn relay feed 10A Power telescoping mirror switch Demand lamps underhood and illuminated visor battery saver P26 10A Cluster S 27 20A Ignition switch feed Passenger compartment fuses 28 43 and 45 Engine compartment starter relay coil 57 Diesel engine Engine compartment starter relay diode gasoline engines Passenger Airbag
309. s 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the ee indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the tc indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an I M test of the on board diagnostics system If the K indicator is on refer to the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter Your vehicle may not pass the I M test with the indicator on If the vehicle s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced the on board diagnostics system is reset to a not ready for I M test condition To ready the on board diagnostics system for I M testing a mi
310. s CENTER CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features These include e Utility compartment with cassette CD holder Coin holder e Pen holder e Writing surface e A power point inside and on the rear Laptop storage Hanging file folder supports Rear cupholders Crew Cab only Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER With the ignition in the RUN position the message center located on your instrument cluster A displays text messages that alert you to possible problems or 5 20 malfunctions in your vehicle s a O operating systems All warning messages will also provide an g indicator chime Selectable features Press and release the SELECT RESET control switch to scroll and reset the following functions Select or reset the function by holding the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds Info menu This menu displays the following control displays e Trip Odometer Trip A and Trip B e Distance to Empty 116 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e Average Fuel Economy e Setup Menu e System check e Blank Odometer and compass if equipped off Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Distance to empty DTE Selecting this function from the INFO MENU estimates XX MILES TOE approximately
311. s power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Shifting from 2WD to 4x4 HIGH Rotate the 4x4 control to the 4x4 HIGH position at speeds up to 55 mph 88 km h e The electronic shift 4x4 system is designed to engage 4x4 HIGH when the vehicle is moving If shifted to 4x4 HIGH while at complete stop 4x4 may not engage and the 4x4 indicator may not illuminate until the vehicle is allowed to move at a speed above 1 mph 1 6 km h e Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 2WD Rotate the 4x4 control to 2WD at 1n any forward speed Disengagement K itt m of the transfer case and front hubs EJ e W may be delayed due to torque bind which is caused by driving on dry 2 hard surfaces or performing tight turns while using the 4x4 system e You do not need to operate the vehicle in R Reverse to disengage your front hubs but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the system to immediately disengage Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 4x4 LOW 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Depress the brake 3 Place the gearshift in N Neutral If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission also depress the clutch pedal 253 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving 4 Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4 LOW position 4X4 awp HIGH 5 Hold the shift conditions until the 4x4 LOW indicator light illumi
312. s Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO IN U S A that a Safety Compliance DATE XXXXX GVWR XXXXX LB XXXXX KG ees FGAWR XXXXXX XXXXXXX RGAWR XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Certification Label be affixed to a THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE vehicle and prescribe where the DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE Safety Compliance Certification VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Label may be located The Safety DUUN AIL O OUT UO TAT TA Fv Compliance Certification Label is MAXIMUM LOAD OCCUPANTS LUGGAGE XXXKG XXXXLB 1 d H By th OCCUPANTS X TOTAL X FR X 2ND X RR OCCUPANTS LUGGAGE ocated on the structure by the XX XXXKG XXXXLB iJi iver TIRE XXXX XXXXX XXX X XXXKG XXXXLB trailing edge of the driver s door or PRESSURE FR XXX kPa XX PS COLD the edge of the driver s door PRESSURE RR XXX kPa XX PSI COLD TRAILER TOWING SEE OWNER GUIDE EXT PNT XXXXXX XXXXXX_ RC XX DSO XXXX F0000 BART INTTR TP PS TR AXLE TR SPR T0000 x XX XXX X X XXXX UTC VFOHT 15294A10 GA Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is attached to a metal tag and is located on the driver side A ONE OET instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representat
313. s are properly made 223 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The TBC user interface consists of the following 2 1 GAIN adjustment _ buttons Pressing these buttons a ied C will adjust the TBC s power output 34 65 lt to the trailer brakes in 0 5 sam increments The GAIN setting can OUTPUT o be increased to a maximum of 10 0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking Pressing and holding a button will raise or lower the setting continuously 2 Trailer connection indicator This lamp indicates trailer electrical connection status e When a successful trailer connection is detected the indicator will be green If the electrical connection is lost the indicator will flash red If the connection is lost while the vehicle is stationary the indicator will turn off after 30 seconds If the connection is lost while the vehicle is moving the indicator will flash until the ignition is turned off then on again or if there is a reconnection If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on pressing a GAIN adjustment button will display the GAIN setting Sliding the manual control will display the GAIN setting OUTPUT bar graph and light the trailer indicator red 3 GAIN setting display Shows the current GAIN setting This will illuminate when a trailer is connected flas
314. s coming from Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling e Place seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Automatic locking mode passenger side front and outboard rear seating positions Gf equipped section in this chapter 184 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 pounds 27 kg in a child restraint and to provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds 86 kg using an upper torso harness and a belt positioning booster Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap Install the child safety seat in a seating position with a tether anchor For more information on top tether straps and anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Rear facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed in
315. s may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out and enable a successful rocking maneuver If a system fault is detected the traction control active light will illuminate the Traction Control button will not turn the system on or off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than three to five seconds when the engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level below the FULL COLD mark on the dipstick e Some noise is normal during operation If excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer e Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused by low power steering fluid Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the FULL HOT mark on the dipstick as this may result in leaks from the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment If any steering components are serviced or repla
316. s of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford Dealer Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased ris
317. s on the first try turn the key to OFF wait 10 seconds and try again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try again this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel If your vehicle has an automatic transmission it will have a computer assisted cranking system This feature assists in starting the engine If the ignition key is turned to the 4 START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least one inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air USING THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach 10 F 23 C or below For best results plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle The plug for the block heater is exposed in the
318. s show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements 205 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e DRW Six tire rotation 2 2 2 2 2 If your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is recommended that M the front and rear tires in pairs be rotated only side to side We do not recommend splitting up the dual rear wheels Rotate them side to side as a set pair After tire rotation inflation pressures must be adjusted for the tires new positions in accordance with vehicle me requirements UU Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask your authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare
319. s with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs Parking On some 4WD vehicles when the transfer case is in the N Neutral position the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline Therefore the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P Park or the manual transmission is in gear Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your autho
320. sacder 204 GAT E sac cec Pe reccyee dee E E 200 CHANGING cesoie 279 282 checking the pressure 199 INPLAUING seeren 196 365 Index lapel rannani ne 211 replacing neiciissnioasyere nnii 202 YOLINE 2 scszsssctideiacceessecestevessnees 204 safety practices ccccee 203 sidewall information 206 snow tires and chains all Spare tire cssecsccieesvensssadenveness 78 CEYMINOLOSY serccis ci scovssacweveenessecae 195 tire grades sicssastessennzcacesseseesedie 195 treddwear socsinereresses 194 201 TOWNE rinor 219 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 223 trailer towing ccscecsrereisinss 219 WIECKET pescci cress ses ienaat 296 Traction control cce 237 Traction lok rear axle 239 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 223 Transfer case fluid checking eee 348 Transmission automatic operation 95 240 brake shift interlock BSD 240 fluid checking and adding automatic 2 343 fluid checking and adding MANUAL 5 sseccssaesentenneetscaresedage 347 366 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus fluid refill capacities manual operation 0 Turn signal U Upfitter controls vV Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle loading Ventilating your vehicle Ww Warning lights see Lights Washer fluid Water Driving through Windows Windshield washer
321. se objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system behave as follows e When the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position the indicator will flash once every 2 seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent 148 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security e When the ignition is in the 3 ON position the indicator will glow for 3 seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system has enabled the engine Vehicles without the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system behave as follows e When the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position the indicator will not flash e When the igniton is in the 3 ON position the indicator will glow for 3 seconds to indicate the engine is enabled Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to
322. sh guards Step bars Tonneau covers Wheels Interior style Electrochromatic compass temperature interior mirrors Floor mats Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s package Bedliners and bedmats 359 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Accessories Cargo organization and management Towing mirrors Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories Peace of mind Mobile ease hands free communication system Remote start Vehicle security systems Wheel locks Not all accessories are available for all models For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by your authorized dealer e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularl
323. splay to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4 seconds 119 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the SELECT RESET control and clearing the warning message Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories e They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition OFF RUN cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle siexisis i Drain water separator Diesel engine only DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver s door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger s door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed LOW FUEL LEVEL Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition 120 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied or not fully released CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module
324. splayed when the driver s door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger s door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed LOW FUEL LEVEL Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied or not fully released CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module 129 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls TRAILER FAULT if equipped Displayed if there is a short circuit on the electric brake output wire or the trailer brakes are drawing too much current Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TBC FAULT if equipped Displayed in response to faults sensed by the trailer brake controller TBC In the event this message is seen please take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for diagnosis and repair Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Integrated trailer brake controller in the Ti
325. sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible e If your vehicle is equipped with running boards do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface as the area may become slippery WAXING Applying Motorcraft Paint Sealant ZC 45 to your vehicle every six months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives Use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof 306 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus C
326. ss POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones A red indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON Press POWER again to turn the headphones off Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the headband adjustment Select the desired audio source Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B selection switch on the ear piece e Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use After approximately one minute of not being in use no infrared signal is received the wireless headphones will automatically turn off They will also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature If this happens simply turn the headphones on again and continue use 56 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Wired headphones Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves You may purchase wired headphones for your FES Family Entertainment System Plug them into the 3 5 mm headphone jack s located on the left and right sides of the system Channel A is located on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side These headphones will be active when in Dual
327. st relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 291 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting
328. stem label side up 4 The track and elapsed time will CD AUDIO DISC ma 2 00 54 appear in the status bar Use the TRACK DVD cursor controls on the bezel to highlight which track you would like to play You can also use the cursor controls to highlight COMPRESSION SHUFFLE or SCAN Once you have highlighted the desired track or function press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm your selection COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature ON OFF SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order Press again to stop 61 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD Press again to stop Playing MP3 discs To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the DVD system is ON 3 Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system label side up 4 The folder track and elapsed time will appear in the status bar The screen will list the Artist Title lt Nono gt SSS Album and File Name A ELP The Only Waymp3 COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD MP3 passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature ON OFF SHUFFLE Press to hear all
329. stem is working properly Category information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly You are in a location that is blocking the SIRIUS signal i e tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process should take no longer than one minute Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to re activate or resolve subscription issues Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System Refer to the Navigation supplement for further information FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES which allows you to listen to audio CDs MP3 discs watch DVDs 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 43 Entertainment Systems and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems The DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs CDs MP3s and is compatible with CD R W CD R and certain CD ROM media Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety information Quick start Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system two sets of wireless infrared IR headphones and a wireless infrared IR remote control To play a DVD in the DVD system The DVD system can play DVD Video DVD R DV
330. t directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the fi
331. t help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 303 2008 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or call For a free publication catalog order toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Ctems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French owner s guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may o
332. t put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant yellow colored meeting Ford Specification WSS M97B51 Al 325 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Note Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets may darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan e Do not add mix an orange colored extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification WSS M97B44 D or DEX COOL brand with the factory filled coolant Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any orange colored extended life product such as DEX COOL brand with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from o
333. t quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Depress the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park 241 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll
334. taining MP3 files from F001 folder TOO1 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 39 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various P 4 mp3 O files may be present files with L mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y Jm 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety fi mps of tasks on your work computer J1 mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system FT _ mp3 L mp3 LF Bdo lEl ppt xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels Satellite radio frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts within a frequency range of 2320 0 MHz 2332 5 MHz This frequency range is sub divided into over 120 channels of music news sports weather and traffic
335. th the instrument cluster message center These messages accompanied by a single chime will be displayed when the 225 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TBC determines a malfunction in the trailer connection TBC system or in the trailer These messages are listed below TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped with message center or CHECK TRAILER if equipped with mini message center This message is displayed when a trailer connection was determined and then a disconnection either intentionally or unintentionally has been sensed during a given ignition cycle It is also displayed if a trailer fault occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected TBC FAULT This message is displayed in response to faults sensed by the TBC In the event this message is seen please take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for diagnosis and repair The TBC may still function but performance may be degraded WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER The TBC is capable of determining certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring brake system These faults do not mean there is anything wrong with the TBC This message is displayed when one of the following faults has occurred e Short circuit on the electric brake output wire If the TRAILER FAULT message is displayed with no trailer connected the problem is with th
336. the 1 OFF LOCK position Memory seats adjustable pedals mirrors if equipped The remote entry system can also control the memory seat adjustable pedals mirrors Press 2 to automatically move the seat adjustable pedals and mirrors to the desired memory position the seat position corresponds to the transmitter being used Activating the memory seat feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat adjustable pedals and mirrors to the position desired 2 Press the SET control on the driver s door panel 3 Within 5 five seconds press one control on the remote transmitter and then press the 1 or 2 control on the lower center portion of the instrument panel which you would 1 2 like to associate with the seat and Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions 4 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Deactivating the memory seat feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press the SET control on the driver s door panel 2 Within 5 five seconds press any control on the remote transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on the lower center portion of the instrument panel 3 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent 142 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security To
337. the 3 ON position with a coded key disarms the vehicle Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement Keys Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle Only SecuriLock keys can be used To program a coded key yourself you will need two previously programmed coded keys Keys that already 149 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 OFF LOCK position to the 3 ON position maintain ignition in the 3 ON position for at least one second but no more than ten
338. the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the 3 ON position to the 1 OFF LOCK position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the 3 ON position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds Note The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been deactivated The horn will chirp once and honk once one short and one long to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been activated 7 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position to exit the procedure Note The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 145 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security liluminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the 3 ON position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 controls on the keyless entry keypad are pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control Gf equipped must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the d
339. the front seats unless the passenger airbag On Off switch is turned off See Passenger airbag ON OFF switch in this chapter Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat Child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off See Passenger airbag on off switch Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off 185 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 186 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus B Seating and Safety Restraints 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt an
340. through which a representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options for settlement of your claim If mediation is not successful customers with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept it If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well If the arbitrator has decided in your favor and you accept the decision the BBB AUTO LINE program will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a timely manner Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE you will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them You will then be mailed a Customer Claim Form that you will need to complete provide proof of vehicle ownership sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by callin
341. ting procedures and maintenance can be found in your Owner s Guide You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase 193 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces
342. tinuous operation as a stationary power source due to the potential for the normal venting of fuel vapors For stationary PTO operation of extended duration beyond 10 minutes diesel engine is recommended Further consult your aftermarket PTO installer since the duration of operation limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of 261 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom A A of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes SNOWPLOWING Ford recommends that the Super Duty F Series used for snow removal include a snow plow package option Installing the snowplow Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowpl
343. tion ensure the locking pins and knobs are fully engaged Note Ensure all cargo is secured Note When the vehicle is in motion the tailgate load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg To open the bed extender into Grocery Mode follow Steps 1 5 by rotating the panels away from the tailgate 135 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system your keys are coded to your vehicle using a non coded key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your dealer supplied keys replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer POWER DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED Press control to unlock all doors Press control to lock all doors Smart locks if equipped This feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open the driver s door and you lock the vehicle with the power door lock control all the doors will lock then the driver s door will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition using the manual lock button on the door locking the driver s door with a key by si
344. tions than in the front seating position 180 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size restrain the child in a safety seat Children who are too large for child safety seats as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always wear safety belts Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child s face or neck the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Child booster seats Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh 40 lb 18 kg and are around 4 years of age Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection these children are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly which could increase the risk of serious injury To im
345. to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 8 lug nut torque sequence 10 lug nut torque sequence 19 Stow the flat tire Refer to Stowing the flat spare tire if the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire carrier Note Do not stow the Harley Davidson flat tire and wheel using the spare tire winch mechanism store the flat in the bed of the truck 20 Stow the jack jack handle and lug wrench Make sure the jack is securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving 21 Unblock the wheels 288 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Stowing the flat spare tire Note Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located in the glove box 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 3 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness Tighten to the best of your ability to the point where the ratchet slip occurs i
346. to reach the lug nuts r ad 2 Attach the spare tire lock key A to the jack handle B Or one wheel nut wrench Slide over c square end of jack handle S QQ 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 281 Roadside Emergencies 3 Fully insert the jack handle with one extension through the bumper hole and into the guide tube The key and lock will engage with a slight push and counterclockwise turn Some resistance will be felt when turning the jack handle assembly I INS 4 Turn the handle counterclockwise and lower the spare tire until you can slide the tire rearward and the cable is slack 5 Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel Tire change procedure 1 Turn engine off and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite of z Q _ the flat tire using the wheel chock aa if equipped If the vehicle is a w 2 4x4 lock the manual hub on the wheel 2 Remove the jack jack handle lug wrench and spare tire from the stowage locations 3 Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim 4 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground When one of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in P Park automatic transmission or R Reverse
347. tor lights and will illuminate in the Message Center Display and function the same as the warning light Check engine The Check engine indicator light illuminates when the C5 ignition is first turned to the RUN position to check the bulb Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning C P light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE ignition is turned to the RUN position when the engine is not running or in a position between RUN and START or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the RUN position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your s
348. towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have your authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by your authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life Unless otherwise specified rotate the tires approximately every 5 000 miles 8 000 km 204 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD front tires at top of diagram A SX AAAS AA CV SA NANANN Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tire
349. tracks on the current MP3 folder in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder Press again to stop FOLDER LIST Press access folder mode and to go to the previous next folder in the MP3 disc MP3 disc quality factors Several factors can effect disc playback quality e Disc capacity Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of storage e Disc type Some CD RW discs may operate inconsistently and may cause an error message to appear We recommend burning MP3 files onto CD R discs Disc finalization The disc may be left open for the purpose of adding sessions to it at a later time but be sure to close each session or the disc will not play DVD MP3 FOLDER1 TRACK7 00 24 o FOLDE ST Bit rate The player supports bit rates from 32 320 kbps as well as variable bit rate MP3 files but lower bit rates will have a noticeable 62 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low fidelity music material We recommend that you encode MP3 files using a high quality encoder e PC configuration Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your computer s resources Follow the PC configuration recommendations of the encoder software vendor We recommend that you avo
350. try system which allows you to unlock the vehicle doors without a key lock all the vehicle doors without a key activate the personal alarm If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Unlocking the doors 1 Press ma and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors Locking the doors 1 Press and release to lock all the doors The parking lamps will flash if all the doors are closed and locked 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed and locked Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp once and the parking lamps will flash once more If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick chirps and the parklamps will not flash Car finder Press A twice within 3 seconds the horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm Press again or turn the ignition to 3 ON to deactivate 141 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in
351. ttings e Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode has been programmed to the module Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If an incorrect code has been entered 7 times 85 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the gt control on the remote entry transmitter e the ignition is turned to the 3 ON position 147 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver s do
352. tual label on your vehicle allowable weight of the fully loaded FrontGAWR GVWR Rear GAWR vehicle including all options MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO IN USA equipment ee and cargo FRONT CATR wos oN REAR GAIR S LB The GVWR is shown on the K a WH TKG me wm Safety Compliance Certification Kor ANS GSS Label located on the B Pillar or 30 PSI COLD AT 30 PSI COLD S VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR the edge of the driver s door ICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF NUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE The GVW must never exceed the Inet Pa o m EA GVWR EXT PNT XXXXXX XXXXXX Dsi wo TyPe evw T pay T TRANS ME T TAPE i 155 GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage mportant The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes
353. tween displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYZ etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use A V lt SEEK SEEK to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A W lt SEEK SEEK to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use W lt SEEK SEEK to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use A IV q SEEK SEEK p to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers ALL SEATS Occupancy mode Available on Audiophile radios only Press MENU repeatedly to access Press A IV 4 SEEK gt to optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS SPEEDVOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use A V lt SEEK SEEK to adjust The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Track Folder Mode Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In Track Mode pressing
354. ub lock dial from AUTO to LOCK and back to AUTO To ensure the transfer case is in 2WD turn the ignition key on then shift to 2WD The 4x4 HIGH light or 4x4 LOW light should not be illuminated in the instrument cluster if either one is illuminated the transfer case is not in 2WD 230 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 OFF LOCK shuts off the engine and all accessories locks the steering wheel gearshift lever and allows key removal 2 ACC allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running This position also unlocks the steering wheel 3 ON all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 START cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian Interference Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine
355. ueeze technique push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel If you lock the wheels release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS apply the brake steadily Do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also putting them on the rear tires This could cause the rear to slide and swing around during braking 260 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a h
356. ugh the following video state options which will be indicated on the bottom right hand corner of the display DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD and Off no indicator If you select the DVD AUX video source the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected When a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input and the display is in the DVD AUX video mode the display will automatically turn on 8 Infrared IR Receiver amp Transmitter System sensor which reads the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the infrared IR wireless headphones 9 LCD screen The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched into the housing when being stored 10 Volume When in Single Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase VOLUME A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 11 A q Headphones Speakers Press once for Dual Play Headphone mode the rear speakers are muted and press again for 49 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Single Play same media playing through all speakers For further interaction information refer to Single Play Dual play 12 MEDIA Press repeatedly to select f
357. ull tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition off prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running 335 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than 2 automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added
358. um return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 212 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label vehicles exported outside the U S and Canada may not have a Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload The appropriate loading capacity of your v
359. upants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1 400 750 5 x 150 650 lb In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 217 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four fri
360. upplemental restraint system SRS is provided Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position Do not put anything on or over the air bag module Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury 172 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses See your authorized dealer The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of
361. urces 57 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system they may listen to another over the headphones DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen to the same audio source SHARED MODE will appear on the radio Note If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel Press A q on the DVD player to am listen to audio over the headphones The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate The system can output two different audio sources over the headphones These are called Channel A and Channel B Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared CIR wireless headphones Press the Headphone Control button A to change the audio source for Channel A Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel A This information will display on the DVD system screen Press the Headphone Control button B to change the audio source for Channel B Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B This information will display on the DVD system screen
362. ursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference and radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability To avoid these outcomes whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to e extremely hot or cold temperatures direct sunlight high humidity a dusty environment locations where strong magnetic fields are generated Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when movin
363. ust enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 259 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead manually shift to a lower gear Your vehicle has anti lock brakes apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations avoid locking of the wheels Use a sq
364. verheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the COLD FILL RANGE level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 326 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill
365. w a a REET T PN 8 mph 40 kwh po QT 99 mph 159 rh OEO pS mph 80 kev p24 mph 200 kr pV 1469 mph 240 rv Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Ref
366. w down and powerfold or manually fold the mirrors in order to complete the fold operation If the powerfold mirrors feel loose or fold very easily it is possible that the powerfold mechanism is out of sync The powerfold mechanism gets out of sync when a mirror is manually folded partially in toward the door then electrically powerfolded Note The mirrors will not be out of sync if the mirrors are manually folded all the way in or out and then powerfolded In order to re sync the mirrors manually fold the mirrors toward the door until a click is heard Then press the powerfold switch to electrically fold the mirrors in then out Telescoping mirrors if equipped The telescoping feature allows the mirror to extend approximately 2 75 inches 70 mm This feature is especially useful to the driver when towing a trailer Mirrors can be manually pulled out or pushed in to the desired telescopic position If equipped with power telescoping mirrors you can simultaneously position both mirrors using the power telescope switch found on the door trim panel e To telescope the mirrors outboard press and hold the left side of the power telescope switch until the mirrors reach their desired position When the end of travel is reached it is normal to hear the power telescoping motors running as long as you continue to hold the switch To telescope the mirrors inboard press and hold the right side of the power telescope switch u
367. w the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations If you own a trailer with a hydraulic brake system do not connect the trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system The vehicle s brake system is only designed to carry the appropriate amount of brake fluid for the vehicle alone Connecting a hydraulic trailer braking system could adversely affect your vehicle s braking performance The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Integrated trailer brake controller if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer Brake Controller TBC When used properly the TBC helps ensure smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer s electric brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle s brake pressure The Ford TBC has only been verified to be compatible with trailers having electric actuated drum brakes one to four axles and not hydraulic surge or electric over hydraulic types It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately functioning normally and all electric connection
368. with a three button message center press and release the message center INFO button until TRIP A or TRIP B appears in the display Press the RESET button to reset Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure The needle should stay in the normal operating range between L and N H If the needle falls below the normal range stop the vehicle turn off the engine and check the engine oil level Add oil if needed If the oil level is correct have your vehicle checked at your authorized dealer 19 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the RUN position The fuel F gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information Battery voltage gauge manual transmission only Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the RUN position If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range have the vehicle s electrical system checked as soon as possible T
369. y even if the modification is removed When a dealer or repair facility works on your vehicle it may be necessary for them to access the information in the Powertrain Control System This information will likely identify if any unauthorized modifications have been made to the system and may be used to determine if repairs will be covered by warranty Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Cell phone use The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios 2008 F 250 350 450
370. y if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 360 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus A Accessory delay cccccceeeeeeeee 99 Air cleaner filter 348 350 Air conditioning 00 0 cece 75 Airbag supplemental restraint SYSTE serate AEE EE 171 172 and child safety seats 173 GESCHPUION sosi nispenerii si 172 disposal pernisriing einni 175 driver airbag 0 00 174 indicator light 175 OPETAllON sessen esne 174 passenger airbag o 174 passenger deactivation SWILE arane E 176 Ambulance packages 008 8 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 0 0 324 Anti lock brake system see Brakes aiseee 235 Anti theft system 148 arming the system 00 149 Audio system see Radio sressirsssirissei 22 24 30 Automatic transmission 240 driving an automatic OVELOLIVE vansarnir 241 fluid adding cceeeeees 343 fluid checking siseriererere 343 fluid refill capacities 352 Auxiliary Input Jack
371. ystem has been enabled CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside ey e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock e Move lock control down to disengage the childproof lock REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers 140 2008 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with a remote en

Ford 2007 Focus Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents